Revision of Configuration.h

Lucas Teske revised this gist 4 years ago. Go to revision

1 file changed, 99 insertions

_Bootscreen.h(file created)

		@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
1	+	/**
2	+	* Marlin 3D Printer Firmware
3	+	* Copyright (c) 2020 MarlinFirmware [https://github.com/MarlinFirmware/Marlin]
4	+	*
5	+	* Based on Sprinter and grbl.
6	+	* Copyright (c) 2011 Camiel Gubbels / Erik van der Zalm
7	+	*
8	+	* This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
9	+	* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
10	+	* the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
11	+	* (at your option) any later version.
12	+	*
13	+	* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
14	+	* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
15	+	* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
16	+	* GNU General Public License for more details.
17	+	*
18	+	* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19	+	* along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
20	+	*
21	+	*/
22	+	#pragma once
23	+
24	+	#define CONFIG_EXAMPLES_DIR "Creality/Ender-3 Pro"
25	+
26	+	/**
27	+	* Custom Boot Screen bitmap
28	+	*
29	+	* Place this file in the root with your configuration files
30	+	* and enable SHOW_CUSTOM_BOOTSCREEN in Configuration.h.
31	+	*
32	+	* Use the Marlin Bitmap Converter to make your own:
33	+	* https://marlinfw.org/tools/u8glib/converter.html
34	+	*/
35	+
36	+	#define CUSTOM_BOOTSCREEN_TIMEOUT 1000
37	+	#define CUSTOM_BOOTSCREEN_BMPWIDTH 81
38	+	#define CUSTOM_BOOTSCREEN_INVERTED
39	+
40	+	const unsigned char custom_start_bmp[] PROGMEM = {
41	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11101111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
42	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11101111,B11101111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
43	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100111,B11011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
44	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100111,B11011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
45	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100011,B11011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
46	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11110011,B11001111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
47	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100001,B11100001,B11001111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
48	+	B11111111,B11111110,B01111000,B00000000,B00000000,B00000011,B11011101,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
49	+	B11111110,B11111111,B10000000,B01111110,B00000000,B00000001,B11101110,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
50	+	B11111110,B01111101,B11001111,B11111100,B00000000,B00000000,B11110111,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
51	+	B11111111,B10001110,B00000110,B00000000,B00000000,B00000000,B01111011,B10111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
52	+	B11111111,B11000000,B00000000,B00000000,B00000000,B00000000,B01111101,B11011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
53	+	B11111111,B11111100,B00000001,B11111110,B00000000,B00000000,B00111110,B11100111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
54	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111100,B00000000,B00000011,B00011111,B01110011,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
55	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111000,B00000000,B00000001,B10001111,B10000001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
56	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100000,B00000000,B00000000,B10000011,B11111001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
57	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B00000000,B11111100,B00000000,B00000000,B11110000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
58	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11100000,B00001111,B11111111,B11000000,B00000000,B00000000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
59	+	B11111111,B11111110,B00000011,B11111111,B11111111,B11000000,B00000000,B00000000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
60	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111001,B00000000,B00000000,B00000000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
61	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111100,B00000000,B00000111,B11000000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
62	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B00000000,B00000111,B11100000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
63	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100000,B00000111,B11110001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
64	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111100,B00000111,B11111001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
65	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B00000011,B11111001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
66	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B10000011,B11111001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
67	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11000011,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
68	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
69	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11110000,B10111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
70	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111011,B11111000,B00111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
71	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111001,B11111000,B00111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
72	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B01111110,B11110000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
73	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B10001110,B00000011,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
74	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100000,B00011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
75	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
76	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
77	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
78	+	B11111111,B00000000,B00000000,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111000,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
79	+	B11111111,B10000000,B00000000,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11100000,B01111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
80	+	B11111111,B11000011,B11111100,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
81	+	B11111111,B11000011,B11111100,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111000,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
82	+	B11111111,B10000111,B11111101,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11110001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
83	+	B11111111,B10000111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11110001,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,
84	+	B11111111,B00001111,B11100111,B11110011,B00001111,B11111100,B00100011,B11111100,B00111111,B11111111,B11111111,
85	+	B11111111,B00001111,B11101111,B10000000,B00000111,B11110000,B00000011,B11110000,B00011110,B00000000,B01111111,
86	+	B11111110,B00011111,B11001111,B10000001,B10000111,B11000111,B10000111,B11000111,B00001100,B00000000,B01111111,
87	+	B11111110,B00000000,B00011111,B11000111,B11000111,B10001111,B11000111,B10011111,B00001111,B00001100,B11111111,
88	+	B11111110,B00000000,B00011111,B10000111,B10001111,B00011111,B10001111,B00011111,B00001111,B00011111,B11111111,
89	+	B11111100,B00111111,B10011111,B10001111,B10001111,B00011111,B10001110,B00000000,B00011110,B00111111,B11111111,
90	+	B11111100,B01111111,B00111111,B00001111,B00011110,B00111111,B00011110,B00111111,B11111110,B00111111,B11111111,
91	+	B11111000,B01111111,B11111111,B00011111,B00011100,B00111111,B00011100,B01111111,B11111100,B01111111,B11111111,
92	+	B11111000,B11111111,B11111111,B00011110,B00011100,B01111110,B00011100,B01111111,B11111100,B01111111,B11111111,
93	+	B11110000,B11111111,B11001110,B00111110,B00111100,B01111110,B00111100,B01111111,B10111000,B11111111,B11111111,
94	+	B11110000,B11111111,B10011110,B00111100,B00111000,B01111100,B00111000,B01111110,B01111000,B11111111,B11111111,
95	+	B11100001,B11111111,B00111100,B01111100,B01111000,B01111100,B01111000,B00111100,B11110001,B11111111,B11111111,
96	+	B11100001,B11111000,B00111000,B01111000,B01111000,B00010000,B00011000,B00000001,B11110001,B11111111,B11111111,
97	+	B00000000,B00000000,B01100000,B00100000,B00111100,B00000000,B01111100,B00000111,B10000000,B01111111,B11111111,
98	+	B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111110,B00011111,B11111110,B00011111,B11111111,B11111111,B11111111
99	+	};

Lucas Teske revised this gist 5 years ago. Go to revision

2 files changed, 6010 insertions

Configuration.h(file created)

		@@ -0,0 +1,2421 @@
1	+	/**
2	+	* Marlin 3D Printer Firmware
3	+	* Copyright (c) 2020 MarlinFirmware [https://github.com/MarlinFirmware/Marlin]
4	+	*
5	+	* Based on Sprinter and grbl.
6	+	* Copyright (c) 2011 Camiel Gubbels / Erik van der Zalm
7	+	*
8	+	* This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
9	+	* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
10	+	* the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
11	+	* (at your option) any later version.
12	+	*
13	+	* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
14	+	* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
15	+	* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
16	+	* GNU General Public License for more details.
17	+	*
18	+	* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19	+	* along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
20	+	*
21	+	*/
22	+	#pragma once
23	+
24	+	/**
25	+	* Configuration.h
26	+	*
27	+	* Basic settings such as:
28	+	*
29	+	* - Type of electronics
30	+	* - Type of temperature sensor
31	+	* - Printer geometry
32	+	* - Endstop configuration
33	+	* - LCD controller
34	+	* - Extra features
35	+	*
36	+	* Advanced settings can be found in Configuration_adv.h
37	+	*/
38	+	#define CONFIGURATION_H_VERSION 020007
39	+
40	+	//===========================================================================
41	+	//============================= Getting Started =============================
42	+	//===========================================================================
43	+
44	+	/**
45	+	* Here are some standard links for getting your machine calibrated:
46	+	*
47	+	* https://reprap.org/wiki/Calibration
48	+	* https://youtu.be/wAL9d7FgInk
49	+	* http://calculator.josefprusa.cz
50	+	* https://reprap.org/wiki/Triffid_Hunter%27s_Calibration_Guide
51	+	* https://www.thingiverse.com/thing:5573
52	+	* https://sites.google.com/site/repraplogphase/calibration-of-your-reprap
53	+	* https://www.thingiverse.com/thing:298812
54	+	*/
55	+
56	+	//===========================================================================
57	+	//============================= DELTA Printer ===============================
58	+	//===========================================================================
59	+	// For a Delta printer start with one of the configuration files in the
60	+	// config/examples/delta directory and customize for your machine.
61	+	//
62	+
63	+	//===========================================================================
64	+	//============================= SCARA Printer ===============================
65	+	//===========================================================================
66	+	// For a SCARA printer start with the configuration files in
67	+	// config/examples/SCARA and customize for your machine.
68	+	//
69	+
70	+	// @section info
71	+
72	+	// Author info of this build printed to the host during boot and M115
73	+	#define STRING_CONFIG_H_AUTHOR "(Teske, Ender-3)" // Who made the changes.
74	+	//#define CUSTOM_VERSION_FILE Version.h // Path from the root directory (no quotes)
75	+
76	+	/**
77	+	* * VENDORS PLEASE READ *
78	+	*
79	+	* Marlin allows you to add a custom boot image for Graphical LCDs.
80	+	* With this option Marlin will first show your custom screen followed
81	+	* by the standard Marlin logo with version number and web URL.
82	+	*
83	+	* We encourage you to take advantage of this new feature and we also
84	+	* respectfully request that you retain the unmodified Marlin boot screen.
85	+	*/
86	+
87	+	// Show the Marlin bootscreen on startup. ENABLE FOR PRODUCTION
88	+	#define SHOW_BOOTSCREEN
89	+
90	+	// Show the bitmap in Marlin/_Bootscreen.h on startup.
91	+	#define SHOW_CUSTOM_BOOTSCREEN
92	+
93	+	// Show the bitmap in Marlin/_Statusscreen.h on the status screen.
94	+	#define CUSTOM_STATUS_SCREEN_IMAGE
95	+
96	+	// @section machine
97	+
98	+	/**
99	+	* Select the serial port on the board to use for communication with the host.
100	+	* This allows the connection of wireless adapters (for instance) to non-default port pins.
101	+	* Serial port -1 is the USB emulated serial port, if available.
102	+	* Note: The first serial port (-1 or 0) will always be used by the Arduino bootloader.
103	+	*
104	+	* :[-1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]
105	+	*/
106	+	#define SERIAL_PORT -1
107	+
108	+	/**
109	+	* Select a secondary serial port on the board to use for communication with the host.
110	+	* :[-1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]
111	+	*/
112	+	#define SERIAL_PORT_2 0
113	+
114	+	/**
115	+	* This setting determines the communication speed of the printer.
116	+	*
117	+	* 250000 works in most cases, but you might try a lower speed if
118	+	* you commonly experience drop-outs during host printing.
119	+	* You may try up to 1000000 to speed up SD file transfer.
120	+	*
121	+	* :[2400, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 250000, 500000, 1000000]
122	+	*/
123	+	#define BAUDRATE 250000
124	+
125	+	// Enable the Bluetooth serial interface on AT90USB devices
126	+	//#define BLUETOOTH
127	+
128	+	// Choose the name from boards.h that matches your setup
129	+	#ifndef MOTHERBOARD
130	+	#define MOTHERBOARD BOARD_BTT_SKR_V1_4_TURBO
131	+	#endif
132	+
133	+	// Name displayed in the LCD "Ready" message and Info menu
134	+	#define CUSTOM_MACHINE_NAME "Ender 3 Pro"
135	+
136	+	// Printer's unique ID, used by some programs to differentiate between machines.
137	+	// Choose your own or use a service like https://www.uuidgenerator.net/version4
138	+	#define MACHINE_UUID "bb28d143-55e3-426c-9501-dd3fae46cccc"
139	+
140	+	// @section extruder
141	+
142	+	// This defines the number of extruders
143	+	// :[0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8]
144	+	#define EXTRUDERS 1
145	+
146	+	// Generally expected filament diameter (1.75, 2.85, 3.0, ...). Used for Volumetric, Filament Width Sensor, etc.
147	+	#define DEFAULT_NOMINAL_FILAMENT_DIA 1.75
148	+
149	+	// For Cyclops or any "multi-extruder" that shares a single nozzle.
150	+	//#define SINGLENOZZLE
151	+
152	+	// Save and restore temperature and fan speed on tool-change.
153	+	// Set standby for the unselected tool with M104/106/109 T...
154	+	#if ENABLED(SINGLENOZZLE)
155	+	//#define SINGLENOZZLE_STANDBY_TEMP
156	+	//#define SINGLENOZZLE_STANDBY_FAN
157	+	#endif
158	+
159	+	/**
160	+	* Průša MK2 Single Nozzle Multi-Material Multiplexer, and variants.
161	+	*
162	+	* This device allows one stepper driver on a control board to drive
163	+	* two to eight stepper motors, one at a time, in a manner suitable
164	+	* for extruders.
165	+	*
166	+	* This option only allows the multiplexer to switch on tool-change.
167	+	* Additional options to configure custom E moves are pending.
168	+	*/
169	+	//#define MK2_MULTIPLEXER
170	+	#if ENABLED(MK2_MULTIPLEXER)
171	+	// Override the default DIO selector pins here, if needed.
172	+	// Some pins files may provide defaults for these pins.
173	+	//#define E_MUX0_PIN 40 // Always Required
174	+	//#define E_MUX1_PIN 42 // Needed for 3 to 8 inputs
175	+	//#define E_MUX2_PIN 44 // Needed for 5 to 8 inputs
176	+	#endif
177	+
178	+	/**
179	+	* Průša Multi-Material Unit v2
180	+	*
181	+	* Requires NOZZLE_PARK_FEATURE to park print head in case MMU unit fails.
182	+	* Requires EXTRUDERS = 5
183	+	*
184	+	* For additional configuration see Configuration_adv.h
185	+	*/
186	+	//#define PRUSA_MMU2
187	+
188	+	// A dual extruder that uses a single stepper motor
189	+	//#define SWITCHING_EXTRUDER
190	+	#if ENABLED(SWITCHING_EXTRUDER)
191	+	#define SWITCHING_EXTRUDER_SERVO_NR 0
192	+	#define SWITCHING_EXTRUDER_SERVO_ANGLES { 0, 90 } // Angles for E0, E1[, E2, E3]
193	+	#if EXTRUDERS > 3
194	+	#define SWITCHING_EXTRUDER_E23_SERVO_NR 1
195	+	#endif
196	+	#endif
197	+
198	+	// A dual-nozzle that uses a servomotor to raise/lower one (or both) of the nozzles
199	+	//#define SWITCHING_NOZZLE
200	+	#if ENABLED(SWITCHING_NOZZLE)
201	+	#define SWITCHING_NOZZLE_SERVO_NR 0
202	+	//#define SWITCHING_NOZZLE_E1_SERVO_NR 1 // If two servos are used, the index of the second
203	+	#define SWITCHING_NOZZLE_SERVO_ANGLES { 0, 90 } // Angles for E0, E1 (single servo) or lowered/raised (dual servo)
204	+	#endif
205	+
206	+	/**
207	+	* Two separate X-carriages with extruders that connect to a moving part
208	+	* via a solenoid docking mechanism. Requires SOL1_PIN and SOL2_PIN.
209	+	*/
210	+	//#define PARKING_EXTRUDER
211	+
212	+	/**
213	+	* Two separate X-carriages with extruders that connect to a moving part
214	+	* via a magnetic docking mechanism using movements and no solenoid
215	+	*
216	+	* project : https://www.thingiverse.com/thing:3080893
217	+	* movements : https://youtu.be/0xCEiG9VS3k
218	+	* https://youtu.be/Bqbcs0CU2FE
219	+	*/
220	+	//#define MAGNETIC_PARKING_EXTRUDER
221	+
222	+	#if EITHER(PARKING_EXTRUDER, MAGNETIC_PARKING_EXTRUDER)
223	+
224	+	#define PARKING_EXTRUDER_PARKING_X { -78, 184 } // X positions for parking the extruders
225	+	#define PARKING_EXTRUDER_GRAB_DISTANCE 1 // (mm) Distance to move beyond the parking point to grab the extruder
226	+	//#define MANUAL_SOLENOID_CONTROL // Manual control of docking solenoids with M380 S / M381
227	+
228	+	#if ENABLED(PARKING_EXTRUDER)
229	+
230	+	#define PARKING_EXTRUDER_SOLENOIDS_INVERT // If enabled, the solenoid is NOT magnetized with applied voltage
231	+	#define PARKING_EXTRUDER_SOLENOIDS_PINS_ACTIVE LOW // LOW or HIGH pin signal energizes the coil
232	+	#define PARKING_EXTRUDER_SOLENOIDS_DELAY 250 // (ms) Delay for magnetic field. No delay if 0 or not defined.
233	+	//#define MANUAL_SOLENOID_CONTROL // Manual control of docking solenoids with M380 S / M381
234	+
235	+	#elif ENABLED(MAGNETIC_PARKING_EXTRUDER)
236	+
237	+	#define MPE_FAST_SPEED 9000 // (mm/min) Speed for travel before last distance point
238	+	#define MPE_SLOW_SPEED 4500 // (mm/min) Speed for last distance travel to park and couple
239	+	#define MPE_TRAVEL_DISTANCE 10 // (mm) Last distance point
240	+	#define MPE_COMPENSATION 0 // Offset Compensation -1 , 0 , 1 (multiplier) only for coupling
241	+
242	+	#endif
243	+
244	+	#endif
245	+
246	+	/**
247	+	* Switching Toolhead
248	+	*
249	+	* Support for swappable and dockable toolheads, such as
250	+	* the E3D Tool Changer. Toolheads are locked with a servo.
251	+	*/
252	+	//#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD
253	+
254	+	/**
255	+	* Magnetic Switching Toolhead
256	+	*
257	+	* Support swappable and dockable toolheads with a magnetic
258	+	* docking mechanism using movement and no servo.
259	+	*/
260	+	//#define MAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD
261	+
262	+	/**
263	+	* Electromagnetic Switching Toolhead
264	+	*
265	+	* Parking for CoreXY / HBot kinematics.
266	+	* Toolheads are parked at one edge and held with an electromagnet.
267	+	* Supports more than 2 Toolheads. See https://youtu.be/JolbsAKTKf4
268	+	*/
269	+	//#define ELECTROMAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD
270	+
271	+	#if ANY(SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD, MAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD, ELECTROMAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD)
272	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_Y_POS 235 // (mm) Y position of the toolhead dock
273	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_Y_SECURITY 10 // (mm) Security distance Y axis
274	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_Y_CLEAR 60 // (mm) Minimum distance from dock for unobstructed X axis
275	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_X_POS { 215, 0 } // (mm) X positions for parking the extruders
276	+	#if ENABLED(SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD)
277	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_SERVO_NR 2 // Index of the servo connector
278	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_SERVO_ANGLES { 0, 180 } // (degrees) Angles for Lock, Unlock
279	+	#elif ENABLED(MAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD)
280	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_Y_RELEASE 5 // (mm) Security distance Y axis
281	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_X_SECURITY { 90, 150 } // (mm) Security distance X axis (T0,T1)
282	+	//#define PRIME_BEFORE_REMOVE // Prime the nozzle before release from the dock
283	+	#if ENABLED(PRIME_BEFORE_REMOVE)
284	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_PRIME_MM 20 // (mm) Extruder prime length
285	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_RETRACT_MM 10 // (mm) Retract after priming length
286	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_PRIME_FEEDRATE 300 // (mm/min) Extruder prime feedrate
287	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_RETRACT_FEEDRATE 2400 // (mm/min) Extruder retract feedrate
288	+	#endif
289	+	#elif ENABLED(ELECTROMAGNETIC_SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD)
290	+	#define SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD_Z_HOP 2 // (mm) Z raise for switching
291	+	#endif
292	+	#endif
293	+
294	+	/**
295	+	* "Mixing Extruder"
296	+	* - Adds G-codes M163 and M164 to set and "commit" the current mix factors.
297	+	* - Extends the stepping routines to move multiple steppers in proportion to the mix.
298	+	* - Optional support for Repetier Firmware's 'M164 S<index>' supporting virtual tools.
299	+	* - This implementation supports up to two mixing extruders.
300	+	* - Enable DIRECT_MIXING_IN_G1 for M165 and mixing in G1 (from Pia Taubert's reference implementation).
301	+	*/
302	+	//#define MIXING_EXTRUDER
303	+	#if ENABLED(MIXING_EXTRUDER)
304	+	#define MIXING_STEPPERS 2 // Number of steppers in your mixing extruder
305	+	#define MIXING_VIRTUAL_TOOLS 16 // Use the Virtual Tool method with M163 and M164
306	+	//#define DIRECT_MIXING_IN_G1 // Allow ABCDHI mix factors in G1 movement commands
307	+	//#define GRADIENT_MIX // Support for gradient mixing with M166 and LCD
308	+	#if ENABLED(GRADIENT_MIX)
309	+	//#define GRADIENT_VTOOL // Add M166 T to use a V-tool index as a Gradient alias
310	+	#endif
311	+	#endif
312	+
313	+	// Offset of the extruders (uncomment if using more than one and relying on firmware to position when changing).
314	+	// The offset has to be X=0, Y=0 for the extruder 0 hotend (default extruder).
315	+	// For the other hotends it is their distance from the extruder 0 hotend.
316	+	//#define HOTEND_OFFSET_X { 0.0, 20.00 } // (mm) relative X-offset for each nozzle
317	+	//#define HOTEND_OFFSET_Y { 0.0, 5.00 } // (mm) relative Y-offset for each nozzle
318	+	//#define HOTEND_OFFSET_Z { 0.0, 0.00 } // (mm) relative Z-offset for each nozzle
319	+
320	+	// @section machine
321	+
322	+	/**
323	+	* Power Supply Control
324	+	*
325	+	* Enable and connect the power supply to the PS_ON_PIN.
326	+	* Specify whether the power supply is active HIGH or active LOW.
327	+	*/
328	+	//#define PSU_CONTROL
329	+	//#define PSU_NAME "Power Supply"
330	+
331	+	#if ENABLED(PSU_CONTROL)
332	+	#define PSU_ACTIVE_STATE LOW // Set 'LOW' for ATX, 'HIGH' for X-Box
333	+
334	+	//#define PSU_DEFAULT_OFF // Keep power off until enabled directly with M80
335	+	//#define PSU_POWERUP_DELAY 250 // (ms) Delay for the PSU to warm up to full power
336	+
337	+	//#define AUTO_POWER_CONTROL // Enable automatic control of the PS_ON pin
338	+	#if ENABLED(AUTO_POWER_CONTROL)
339	+	#define AUTO_POWER_FANS // Turn on PSU if fans need power
340	+	#define AUTO_POWER_E_FANS
341	+	#define AUTO_POWER_CONTROLLERFAN
342	+	#define AUTO_POWER_CHAMBER_FAN
343	+	//#define AUTO_POWER_E_TEMP 50 // (°C) Turn on PSU over this temperature
344	+	//#define AUTO_POWER_CHAMBER_TEMP 30 // (°C) Turn on PSU over this temperature
345	+	#define POWER_TIMEOUT 30
346	+	#endif
347	+	#endif
348	+
349	+	//===========================================================================
350	+	//============================= Thermal Settings ============================
351	+	//===========================================================================
352	+	// @section temperature
353	+
354	+	/**
355	+	* --NORMAL IS 4.7kohm PULLUP!-- 1kohm pullup can be used on hotend sensor, using correct resistor and table
356	+	*
357	+	* Temperature sensors available:
358	+	*
359	+	* -5 : PT100 / PT1000 with MAX31865 (only for sensors 0-1)
360	+	* -3 : thermocouple with MAX31855 (only for sensors 0-1)
361	+	* -2 : thermocouple with MAX6675 (only for sensors 0-1)
362	+	* -4 : thermocouple with AD8495
363	+	* -1 : thermocouple with AD595
364	+	* 0 : not used
365	+	* 1 : 100k thermistor - best choice for EPCOS 100k (4.7k pullup)
366	+	* 331 : (3.3V scaled thermistor 1 table for MEGA)
367	+	* 332 : (3.3V scaled thermistor 1 table for DUE)
368	+	* 2 : 200k thermistor - ATC Semitec 204GT-2 (4.7k pullup)
369	+	* 202 : 200k thermistor - Copymaster 3D
370	+	* 3 : Mendel-parts thermistor (4.7k pullup)
371	+	* 4 : 10k thermistor !! do not use it for a hotend. It gives bad resolution at high temp. !!
372	+	* 5 : 100K thermistor - ATC Semitec 104GT-2/104NT-4-R025H42G (Used in ParCan, J-Head, and E3D) (4.7k pullup)
373	+	* 501 : 100K Zonestar (Tronxy X3A) Thermistor
374	+	* 502 : 100K Zonestar Thermistor used by hot bed in Zonestar Průša P802M
375	+	* 512 : 100k RPW-Ultra hotend thermistor (4.7k pullup)
376	+	* 6 : 100k EPCOS - Not as accurate as table 1 (created using a fluke thermocouple) (4.7k pullup)
377	+	* 7 : 100k Honeywell thermistor 135-104LAG-J01 (4.7k pullup)
378	+	* 71 : 100k Honeywell thermistor 135-104LAF-J01 (4.7k pullup)
379	+	* 8 : 100k 0603 SMD Vishay NTCS0603E3104FXT (4.7k pullup)
380	+	* 9 : 100k GE Sensing AL03006-58.2K-97-G1 (4.7k pullup)
381	+	* 10 : 100k RS thermistor 198-961 (4.7k pullup)
382	+	* 11 : 100k beta 3950 1% thermistor (Used in Keenovo AC silicone mats and most Wanhao i3 machines) (4.7k pullup)
383	+	* 12 : 100k 0603 SMD Vishay NTCS0603E3104FXT (4.7k pullup) (calibrated for Makibox hot bed)
384	+	* 13 : 100k Hisens 3950 1% up to 300°C for hotend "Simple ONE " & "Hotend "All In ONE"
385	+	* 15 : 100k thermistor calibration for JGAurora A5 hotend
386	+	* 18 : ATC Semitec 204GT-2 (4.7k pullup) Dagoma.Fr - MKS_Base_DKU001327
387	+	* 20 : Pt100 with circuit in the Ultimainboard V2.x with 5v excitation (AVR)
388	+	* 21 : Pt100 with circuit in the Ultimainboard V2.x with 3.3v excitation (STM32 \ LPC176x....)
389	+	* 22 : 100k (hotend) with 4.7k pullup to 3.3V and 220R to analog input (as in GTM32 Pro vB)
390	+	* 23 : 100k (bed) with 4.7k pullup to 3.3v and 220R to analog input (as in GTM32 Pro vB)
391	+	* 30 : Kis3d Silicone heating mat 200W/300W with 6mm precision cast plate (EN AW 5083) NTC100K / B3950 (4.7k pullup)
392	+	* 201 : Pt100 with circuit in Overlord, similar to Ultimainboard V2.x
393	+	* 60 : 100k Maker's Tool Works Kapton Bed Thermistor beta=3950
394	+	* 61 : 100k Formbot / Vivedino 3950 350C thermistor 4.7k pullup
395	+	* 66 : 4.7M High Temperature thermistor from Dyze Design
396	+	* 67 : 450C thermistor from SliceEngineering
397	+	* 70 : the 100K thermistor found in the bq Hephestos 2
398	+	* 75 : 100k Generic Silicon Heat Pad with NTC 100K MGB18-104F39050L32 thermistor
399	+	* 99 : 100k thermistor with a 10K pull-up resistor (found on some Wanhao i3 machines)
400	+	*
401	+	* 1k ohm pullup tables - This is atypical, and requires changing out the 4.7k pullup for 1k.
402	+	* (but gives greater accuracy and more stable PID)
403	+	* 51 : 100k thermistor - EPCOS (1k pullup)
404	+	* 52 : 200k thermistor - ATC Semitec 204GT-2 (1k pullup)
405	+	* 55 : 100k thermistor - ATC Semitec 104GT-2 (Used in ParCan & J-Head) (1k pullup)
406	+	*
407	+	* 1047 : Pt1000 with 4k7 pullup (E3D)
408	+	* 1010 : Pt1000 with 1k pullup (non standard)
409	+	* 147 : Pt100 with 4k7 pullup
410	+	* 110 : Pt100 with 1k pullup (non standard)
411	+	*
412	+	* 1000 : Custom - Specify parameters in Configuration_adv.h
413	+	*
414	+	* Use these for Testing or Development purposes. NEVER for production machine.
415	+	* 998 : Dummy Table that ALWAYS reads 25°C or the temperature defined below.
416	+	* 999 : Dummy Table that ALWAYS reads 100°C or the temperature defined below.
417	+	*/
418	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_0 1
419	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_1 0
420	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_2 0
421	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_3 0
422	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_4 0
423	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_5 0
424	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_6 0
425	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_7 0
426	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_BED 1
427	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_PROBE 0
428	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_CHAMBER 0
429	+
430	+	// Dummy thermistor constant temperature readings, for use with 998 and 999
431	+	#define DUMMY_THERMISTOR_998_VALUE 25
432	+	#define DUMMY_THERMISTOR_999_VALUE 100
433	+
434	+	// Resistor values when using a MAX31865 (sensor -5)
435	+	// Sensor value is typically 100 (PT100) or 1000 (PT1000)
436	+	// Calibration value is typically 430 ohm for AdaFruit PT100 modules and 4300 ohm for AdaFruit PT1000 modules.
437	+	//#define MAX31865_SENSOR_OHMS 100
438	+	//#define MAX31865_CALIBRATION_OHMS 430
439	+
440	+	// Use temp sensor 1 as a redundant sensor with sensor 0. If the readings
441	+	// from the two sensors differ too much the print will be aborted.
442	+	//#define TEMP_SENSOR_1_AS_REDUNDANT
443	+	#define MAX_REDUNDANT_TEMP_SENSOR_DIFF 10
444	+
445	+	#define TEMP_RESIDENCY_TIME 10 // (seconds) Time to wait for hotend to "settle" in M109
446	+	#define TEMP_WINDOW 1 // (°C) Temperature proximity for the "temperature reached" timer
447	+	#define TEMP_HYSTERESIS 3 // (°C) Temperature proximity considered "close enough" to the target
448	+
449	+	#define TEMP_BED_RESIDENCY_TIME 10 // (seconds) Time to wait for bed to "settle" in M190
450	+	#define TEMP_BED_WINDOW 1 // (°C) Temperature proximity for the "temperature reached" timer
451	+	#define TEMP_BED_HYSTERESIS 3 // (°C) Temperature proximity considered "close enough" to the target
452	+
453	+	// Below this temperature the heater will be switched off
454	+	// because it probably indicates a broken thermistor wire.
455	+	#define HEATER_0_MINTEMP 5
456	+	#define HEATER_1_MINTEMP 5
457	+	#define HEATER_2_MINTEMP 5
458	+	#define HEATER_3_MINTEMP 5
459	+	#define HEATER_4_MINTEMP 5
460	+	#define HEATER_5_MINTEMP 5
461	+	#define HEATER_6_MINTEMP 5
462	+	#define HEATER_7_MINTEMP 5
463	+	#define BED_MINTEMP 5
464	+
465	+	// Above this temperature the heater will be switched off.
466	+	// This can protect components from overheating, but NOT from shorts and failures.
467	+	// (Use MINTEMP for thermistor short/failure protection.)
468	+	#define HEATER_0_MAXTEMP 275
469	+	#define HEATER_1_MAXTEMP 275
470	+	#define HEATER_2_MAXTEMP 275
471	+	#define HEATER_3_MAXTEMP 275
472	+	#define HEATER_4_MAXTEMP 275
473	+	#define HEATER_5_MAXTEMP 275
474	+	#define HEATER_6_MAXTEMP 275
475	+	#define HEATER_7_MAXTEMP 275
476	+	#define BED_MAXTEMP 125
477	+
478	+	//===========================================================================
479	+	//============================= PID Settings ================================
480	+	//===========================================================================
481	+	// PID Tuning Guide here: https://reprap.org/wiki/PID_Tuning
482	+
483	+	// Comment the following line to disable PID and enable bang-bang.
484	+	#define PIDTEMP
485	+	#define BANG_MAX 255 // Limits current to nozzle while in bang-bang mode; 255=full current
486	+	#define PID_MAX BANG_MAX // Limits current to nozzle while PID is active (see PID_FUNCTIONAL_RANGE below); 255=full current
487	+	#define PID_K1 0.95 // Smoothing factor within any PID loop
488	+
489	+	#if ENABLED(PIDTEMP)
490	+	//#define PID_EDIT_MENU // Add PID editing to the "Advanced Settings" menu. (~700 bytes of PROGMEM)
491	+	//#define PID_AUTOTUNE_MENU // Add PID auto-tuning to the "Advanced Settings" menu. (~250 bytes of PROGMEM)
492	+	//#define PID_PARAMS_PER_HOTEND // Uses separate PID parameters for each extruder (useful for mismatched extruders)
493	+	// Set/get with gcode: M301 E[extruder number, 0-2]
494	+
495	+	#if ENABLED(PID_PARAMS_PER_HOTEND)
496	+	// Specify between 1 and HOTENDS values per array.
497	+	// If fewer than EXTRUDER values are provided, the last element will be repeated.
498	+	#define DEFAULT_Kp_LIST { 22.20, 22.20 }
499	+	#define DEFAULT_Ki_LIST { 1.08, 1.08 }
500	+	#define DEFAULT_Kd_LIST { 114.00, 114.00 }
501	+	#else
502	+	// Creality Ender-3
503	+	#define DEFAULT_Kp 21.73
504	+	#define DEFAULT_Ki 1.54
505	+	#define DEFAULT_Kd 76.55
506	+	#endif
507	+	#endif // PIDTEMP
508	+
509	+	//===========================================================================
510	+	//====================== PID > Bed Temperature Control ======================
511	+	//===========================================================================
512	+
513	+	/**
514	+	* PID Bed Heating
515	+	*
516	+	* If this option is enabled set PID constants below.
517	+	* If this option is disabled, bang-bang will be used and BED_LIMIT_SWITCHING will enable hysteresis.
518	+	*
519	+	* The PID frequency will be the same as the extruder PWM.
520	+	* If PID_dT is the default, and correct for the hardware/configuration, that means 7.689Hz,
521	+	* which is fine for driving a square wave into a resistive load and does not significantly
522	+	* impact FET heating. This also works fine on a Fotek SSR-10DA Solid State Relay into a 250W
523	+	* heater. If your configuration is significantly different than this and you don't understand
524	+	* the issues involved, don't use bed PID until someone else verifies that your hardware works.
525	+	*/
526	+	//#define PIDTEMPBED
527	+
528	+	//#define BED_LIMIT_SWITCHING
529	+
530	+	/**
531	+	* Max Bed Power
532	+	* Applies to all forms of bed control (PID, bang-bang, and bang-bang with hysteresis).
533	+	* When set to any value below 255, enables a form of PWM to the bed that acts like a divider
534	+	* so don't use it unless you are OK with PWM on your bed. (See the comment on enabling PIDTEMPBED)
535	+	*/
536	+	#define MAX_BED_POWER 255 // limits duty cycle to bed; 255=full current
537	+
538	+	#if ENABLED(PIDTEMPBED)
539	+	//#define MIN_BED_POWER 0
540	+	//#define PID_BED_DEBUG // Sends debug data to the serial port.
541	+
542	+	// 120V 250W silicone heater into 4mm borosilicate (MendelMax 1.5+)
543	+	// from FOPDT model - kp=.39 Tp=405 Tdead=66, Tc set to 79.2, aggressive factor of .15 (vs .1, 1, 10)
544	+	#define DEFAULT_bedKp 10.00
545	+	#define DEFAULT_bedKi .023
546	+	#define DEFAULT_bedKd 305.4
547	+
548	+	// FIND YOUR OWN: "M303 E-1 C8 S90" to run autotune on the bed at 90 degreesC for 8 cycles.
549	+	#endif // PIDTEMPBED
550	+
551	+	#if EITHER(PIDTEMP, PIDTEMPBED)
552	+	//#define PID_DEBUG // Sends debug data to the serial port. Use 'M303 D' to toggle activation.
553	+	//#define PID_OPENLOOP // Puts PID in open loop. M104/M140 sets the output power from 0 to PID_MAX
554	+	//#define SLOW_PWM_HEATERS // PWM with very low frequency (roughly 0.125Hz=8s) and minimum state time of approximately 1s useful for heaters driven by a relay
555	+	#define PID_FUNCTIONAL_RANGE 10 // If the temperature difference between the target temperature and the actual temperature
556	+	// is more than PID_FUNCTIONAL_RANGE then the PID will be shut off and the heater will be set to min/max.
557	+	#endif
558	+
559	+	// @section extruder
560	+
561	+	/**
562	+	* Prevent extrusion if the temperature is below EXTRUDE_MINTEMP.
563	+	* Add M302 to set the minimum extrusion temperature and/or turn
564	+	* cold extrusion prevention on and off.
565	+	*
566	+	* * IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO LEAVE THIS OPTION ENABLED! *
567	+	*/
568	+	#define PREVENT_COLD_EXTRUSION
569	+	#define EXTRUDE_MINTEMP 170
570	+
571	+	/**
572	+	* Prevent a single extrusion longer than EXTRUDE_MAXLENGTH.
573	+	* Note: For Bowden Extruders make this large enough to allow load/unload.
574	+	*/
575	+	#define PREVENT_LENGTHY_EXTRUDE
576	+	#define EXTRUDE_MAXLENGTH 200
577	+
578	+	//===========================================================================
579	+	//======================== Thermal Runaway Protection =======================
580	+	//===========================================================================
581	+
582	+	/**
583	+	* Thermal Protection provides additional protection to your printer from damage
584	+	* and fire. Marlin always includes safe min and max temperature ranges which
585	+	* protect against a broken or disconnected thermistor wire.
586	+	*
587	+	* The issue: If a thermistor falls out, it will report the much lower
588	+	* temperature of the air in the room, and the the firmware will keep
589	+	* the heater on.
590	+	*
591	+	* If you get "Thermal Runaway" or "Heating failed" errors the
592	+	* details can be tuned in Configuration_adv.h
593	+	*/
594	+
595	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_HOTENDS // Enable thermal protection for all extruders
596	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_BED // Enable thermal protection for the heated bed
597	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_CHAMBER // Enable thermal protection for the heated chamber
598	+
599	+	//===========================================================================
600	+	//============================= Mechanical Settings =========================
601	+	//===========================================================================
602	+
603	+	// @section machine
604	+
605	+	// Enable one of the options below for CoreXY, CoreXZ, or CoreYZ kinematics,
606	+	// either in the usual order or reversed
607	+	//#define COREXY
608	+	//#define COREXZ
609	+	//#define COREYZ
610	+	//#define COREYX
611	+	//#define COREZX
612	+	//#define COREZY
613	+	//#define MARKFORGED_XY // MarkForged. See https://reprap.org/forum/read.php?152,504042
614	+
615	+	//===========================================================================
616	+	//============================== Endstop Settings ===========================
617	+	//===========================================================================
618	+
619	+	// @section homing
620	+
621	+	// Specify here all the endstop connectors that are connected to any endstop or probe.
622	+	// Almost all printers will be using one per axis. Probes will use one or more of the
623	+	// extra connectors. Leave undefined any used for non-endstop and non-probe purposes.
624	+	#define USE_XMIN_PLUG
625	+	#define USE_YMIN_PLUG
626	+	#define USE_ZMIN_PLUG
627	+	//#define USE_XMAX_PLUG
628	+	//#define USE_YMAX_PLUG
629	+	//#define USE_ZMAX_PLUG
630	+
631	+	// Enable pullup for all endstops to prevent a floating state
632	+	#define ENDSTOPPULLUPS
633	+	#if DISABLED(ENDSTOPPULLUPS)
634	+	// Disable ENDSTOPPULLUPS to set pullups individually
635	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_XMAX
636	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_YMAX
637	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_ZMAX
638	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_XMIN
639	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_YMIN
640	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_ZMIN
641	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLUP_ZMIN_PROBE
642	+	#endif
643	+
644	+	// Enable pulldown for all endstops to prevent a floating state
645	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWNS
646	+	#if DISABLED(ENDSTOPPULLDOWNS)
647	+	// Disable ENDSTOPPULLDOWNS to set pulldowns individually
648	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_XMAX
649	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_YMAX
650	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_ZMAX
651	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_XMIN
652	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_YMIN
653	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_ZMIN
654	+	//#define ENDSTOPPULLDOWN_ZMIN_PROBE
655	+	#endif
656	+
657	+	// Mechanical endstop with COM to ground and NC to Signal uses "false" here (most common setup).
658	+	#define X_MIN_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
659	+	#define Y_MIN_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
660	+	#define Z_MIN_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
661	+	#define X_MAX_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
662	+	#define Y_MAX_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
663	+	#define Z_MAX_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the endstop.
664	+	#define Z_MIN_PROBE_ENDSTOP_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the logic of the probe.
665	+
666	+	/**
667	+	* Stepper Drivers
668	+	*
669	+	* These settings allow Marlin to tune stepper driver timing and enable advanced options for
670	+	* stepper drivers that support them. You may also override timing options in Configuration_adv.h.
671	+	*
672	+	* A4988 is assumed for unspecified drivers.
673	+	*
674	+	* Options: A4988, A5984, DRV8825, LV8729, L6470, L6474, POWERSTEP01,
675	+	* TB6560, TB6600, TMC2100,
676	+	* TMC2130, TMC2130_STANDALONE, TMC2160, TMC2160_STANDALONE,
677	+	* TMC2208, TMC2208_STANDALONE, TMC2209, TMC2209_STANDALONE,
678	+	* TMC26X, TMC26X_STANDALONE, TMC2660, TMC2660_STANDALONE,
679	+	* TMC5130, TMC5130_STANDALONE, TMC5160, TMC5160_STANDALONE
680	+	* :['A4988', 'A5984', 'DRV8825', 'LV8729', 'L6470', 'L6474', 'POWERSTEP01', 'TB6560', 'TB6600', 'TMC2100', 'TMC2130', 'TMC2130_STANDALONE', 'TMC2160', 'TMC2160_STANDALONE', 'TMC2208', 'TMC2208_STANDALONE', 'TMC2209', 'TMC2209_STANDALONE', 'TMC26X', 'TMC26X_STANDALONE', 'TMC2660', 'TMC2660_STANDALONE', 'TMC5130', 'TMC5130_STANDALONE', 'TMC5160', 'TMC5160_STANDALONE']
681	+	*/
682	+	#define X_DRIVER_TYPE TMC2209
683	+	#define Y_DRIVER_TYPE TMC2209
684	+	#define Z_DRIVER_TYPE TMC2209
685	+	//#define X2_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
686	+	//#define Y2_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
687	+	//#define Z2_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
688	+	//#define Z3_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
689	+	//#define Z4_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
690	+	#define E0_DRIVER_TYPE TMC2209
691	+	//#define E1_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
692	+	//#define E2_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
693	+	//#define E3_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
694	+	//#define E4_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
695	+	//#define E5_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
696	+	//#define E6_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
697	+	//#define E7_DRIVER_TYPE A4988
698	+
699	+	// Enable this feature if all enabled endstop pins are interrupt-capable.
700	+	// This will remove the need to poll the interrupt pins, saving many CPU cycles.
701	+	//#define ENDSTOP_INTERRUPTS_FEATURE
702	+
703	+	/**
704	+	* Endstop Noise Threshold
705	+	*
706	+	* Enable if your probe or endstops falsely trigger due to noise.
707	+	*
708	+	* - Higher values may affect repeatability or accuracy of some bed probes.
709	+	* - To fix noise install a 100nF ceramic capacitor in parallel with the switch.
710	+	* - This feature is not required for common micro-switches mounted on PCBs
711	+	* based on the Makerbot design, which already have the 100nF capacitor.
712	+	*
713	+	* :[2,3,4,5,6,7]
714	+	*/
715	+	//#define ENDSTOP_NOISE_THRESHOLD 2
716	+
717	+	// Check for stuck or disconnected endstops during homing moves.
718	+	//#define DETECT_BROKEN_ENDSTOP
719	+
720	+	//=============================================================================
721	+	//============================== Movement Settings ============================
722	+	//=============================================================================
723	+	// @section motion
724	+
725	+	/**
726	+	* Default Settings
727	+	*
728	+	* These settings can be reset by M502
729	+	*
730	+	* Note that if EEPROM is enabled, saved values will override these.
731	+	*/
732	+
733	+	/**
734	+	* With this option each E stepper can have its own factors for the
735	+	* following movement settings. If fewer factors are given than the
736	+	* total number of extruders, the last value applies to the rest.
737	+	*/
738	+	//#define DISTINCT_E_FACTORS
739	+
740	+	/**
741	+	* Default Axis Steps Per Unit (steps/mm)
742	+	* Override with M92
743	+	* X, Y, Z, E0 [, E1[, E2...]]
744	+	*/
745	+	#define DEFAULT_AXIS_STEPS_PER_UNIT { 80, 80, 400, 93 }
746	+
747	+	/**
748	+	* Default Max Feed Rate (mm/s)
749	+	* Override with M203
750	+	* X, Y, Z, E0 [, E1[, E2...]]
751	+	*/
752	+	#define DEFAULT_MAX_FEEDRATE { 500, 500, 5, 25 }
753	+
754	+	//#define LIMITED_MAX_FR_EDITING // Limit edit via M203 or LCD to DEFAULT_MAX_FEEDRATE * 2
755	+	#if ENABLED(LIMITED_MAX_FR_EDITING)
756	+	#define MAX_FEEDRATE_EDIT_VALUES { 600, 600, 10, 50 } // ...or, set your own edit limits
757	+	#endif
758	+
759	+	/**
760	+	* Default Max Acceleration (change/s) change = mm/s
761	+	* (Maximum start speed for accelerated moves)
762	+	* Override with M201
763	+	* X, Y, Z, E0 [, E1[, E2...]]
764	+	*/
765	+	#define DEFAULT_MAX_ACCELERATION { 500, 500, 100, 5000 }
766	+
767	+	//#define LIMITED_MAX_ACCEL_EDITING // Limit edit via M201 or LCD to DEFAULT_MAX_ACCELERATION * 2
768	+	#if ENABLED(LIMITED_MAX_ACCEL_EDITING)
769	+	#define MAX_ACCEL_EDIT_VALUES { 6000, 6000, 200, 20000 } // ...or, set your own edit limits
770	+	#endif
771	+
772	+	/**
773	+	* Default Acceleration (change/s) change = mm/s
774	+	* Override with M204
775	+	*
776	+	* M204 P Acceleration
777	+	* M204 R Retract Acceleration
778	+	* M204 T Travel Acceleration
779	+	*/
780	+	#define DEFAULT_ACCELERATION 500 // X, Y, Z and E acceleration for printing moves
781	+	#define DEFAULT_RETRACT_ACCELERATION 500 // E acceleration for retracts
782	+	#define DEFAULT_TRAVEL_ACCELERATION 500 // X, Y, Z acceleration for travel (non printing) moves
783	+
784	+	/**
785	+	* Default Jerk limits (mm/s)
786	+	* Override with M205 X Y Z E
787	+	*
788	+	* "Jerk" specifies the minimum speed change that requires acceleration.
789	+	* When changing speed and direction, if the difference is less than the
790	+	* value set here, it may happen instantaneously.
791	+	*/
792	+	//#define CLASSIC_JERK
793	+	#if ENABLED(CLASSIC_JERK)
794	+	#define DEFAULT_XJERK 10.0
795	+	#define DEFAULT_YJERK 10.0
796	+	#define DEFAULT_ZJERK 0.3
797	+
798	+	//#define TRAVEL_EXTRA_XYJERK 0.0 // Additional jerk allowance for all travel moves
799	+
800	+	//#define LIMITED_JERK_EDITING // Limit edit via M205 or LCD to DEFAULT_aJERK * 2
801	+	#if ENABLED(LIMITED_JERK_EDITING)
802	+	#define MAX_JERK_EDIT_VALUES { 20, 20, 0.6, 10 } // ...or, set your own edit limits
803	+	#endif
804	+	#endif
805	+
806	+	#define DEFAULT_EJERK 5.0 // May be used by Linear Advance
807	+
808	+	/**
809	+	* Junction Deviation Factor
810	+	*
811	+	* See:
812	+	* https://reprap.org/forum/read.php?1,739819
813	+	* https://blog.kyneticcnc.com/2018/10/computing-junction-deviation-for-marlin.html
814	+	*/
815	+	#if DISABLED(CLASSIC_JERK)
816	+	#define JUNCTION_DEVIATION_MM 0.02 // (mm) Distance from real junction edge
817	+	#define JD_HANDLE_SMALL_SEGMENTS // Use curvature estimation instead of just the junction angle
818	+	// for small segments (< 1mm) with large junction angles (> 135°).
819	+	#endif
820	+
821	+	/**
822	+	* S-Curve Acceleration
823	+	*
824	+	* This option eliminates vibration during printing by fitting a Bézier
825	+	* curve to move acceleration, producing much smoother direction changes.
826	+	*
827	+	* See https://github.com/synthetos/TinyG/wiki/Jerk-Controlled-Motion-Explained
828	+	*/
829	+	//#define S_CURVE_ACCELERATION
830	+
831	+	//===========================================================================
832	+	//============================= Z Probe Options =============================
833	+	//===========================================================================
834	+	// @section probes
835	+
836	+	//
837	+	// See https://marlinfw.org/docs/configuration/probes.html
838	+	//
839	+
840	+	/**
841	+	* Enable this option for a probe connected to the Z-MIN pin.
842	+	* The probe replaces the Z-MIN endstop and is used for Z homing.
843	+	* (Automatically enables USE_PROBE_FOR_Z_HOMING.)
844	+	*/
845	+	// #define Z_MIN_PROBE_USES_Z_MIN_ENDSTOP_PIN
846	+
847	+	// Force the use of the probe for Z-axis homing
848	+	#define USE_PROBE_FOR_Z_HOMING
849	+
850	+	/**
851	+	* Z_MIN_PROBE_PIN
852	+	*
853	+	* Define this pin if the probe is not connected to Z_MIN_PIN.
854	+	* If not defined the default pin for the selected MOTHERBOARD
855	+	* will be used. Most of the time the default is what you want.
856	+	*
857	+	* - The simplest option is to use a free endstop connector.
858	+	* - Use 5V for powered (usually inductive) sensors.
859	+	*
860	+	* - RAMPS 1.3/1.4 boards may use the 5V, GND, and Aux4->D32 pin:
861	+	* - For simple switches connect...
862	+	* - normally-closed switches to GND and D32.
863	+	* - normally-open switches to 5V and D32.
864	+	*/
865	+	//#define Z_MIN_PROBE_PIN 32 // Pin 32 is the RAMPS default
866	+	#define Z_MIN_PROBE_PIN P0_10
867	+	/**
868	+	* Probe Type
869	+	*
870	+	* Allen Key Probes, Servo Probes, Z-Sled Probes, FIX_MOUNTED_PROBE, etc.
871	+	* Activate one of these to use Auto Bed Leveling below.
872	+	*/
873	+
874	+	/**
875	+	* The "Manual Probe" provides a means to do "Auto" Bed Leveling without a probe.
876	+	* Use G29 repeatedly, adjusting the Z height at each point with movement commands
877	+	* or (with LCD_BED_LEVELING) the LCD controller.
878	+	*/
879	+	//#define PROBE_MANUALLY
880	+	//#define MANUAL_PROBE_START_Z 0.2
881	+
882	+	/**
883	+	* A Fix-Mounted Probe either doesn't deploy or needs manual deployment.
884	+	* (e.g., an inductive probe or a nozzle-based probe-switch.)
885	+	*/
886	+	//#define FIX_MOUNTED_PROBE
887	+
888	+	/**
889	+	* Use the nozzle as the probe, as with a conductive
890	+	* nozzle system or a piezo-electric smart effector.
891	+	*/
892	+	//#define NOZZLE_AS_PROBE
893	+
894	+	/**
895	+	* Z Servo Probe, such as an endstop switch on a rotating arm.
896	+	*/
897	+	//#define Z_PROBE_SERVO_NR 0 // Defaults to SERVO 0 connector.
898	+	//#define Z_SERVO_ANGLES { 70, 0 } // Z Servo Deploy and Stow angles
899	+
900	+	/**
901	+	* The BLTouch probe uses a Hall effect sensor and emulates a servo.
902	+	*/
903	+	#define BLTOUCH
904	+
905	+	/**
906	+	* Pressure sensor with a BLTouch-like interface
907	+	*/
908	+	//#define CREALITY_TOUCH
909	+
910	+	/**
911	+	* Touch-MI Probe by hotends.fr
912	+	*
913	+	* This probe is deployed and activated by moving the X-axis to a magnet at the edge of the bed.
914	+	* By default, the magnet is assumed to be on the left and activated by a home. If the magnet is
915	+	* on the right, enable and set TOUCH_MI_DEPLOY_XPOS to the deploy position.
916	+	*
917	+	* Also requires: BABYSTEPPING, BABYSTEP_ZPROBE_OFFSET, Z_SAFE_HOMING,
918	+	* and a minimum Z_HOMING_HEIGHT of 10.
919	+	*/
920	+	//#define TOUCH_MI_PROBE
921	+	#if ENABLED(TOUCH_MI_PROBE)
922	+	#define TOUCH_MI_RETRACT_Z 0.5 // Height at which the probe retracts
923	+	//#define TOUCH_MI_DEPLOY_XPOS (X_MAX_BED + 2) // For a magnet on the right side of the bed
924	+	//#define TOUCH_MI_MANUAL_DEPLOY // For manual deploy (LCD menu)
925	+	#endif
926	+
927	+	// A probe that is deployed and stowed with a solenoid pin (SOL1_PIN)
928	+	//#define SOLENOID_PROBE
929	+
930	+	// A sled-mounted probe like those designed by Charles Bell.
931	+	//#define Z_PROBE_SLED
932	+	//#define SLED_DOCKING_OFFSET 5 // The extra distance the X axis must travel to pickup the sled. 0 should be fine but you can push it further if you'd like.
933	+
934	+	// A probe deployed by moving the x-axis, such as the Wilson II's rack-and-pinion probe designed by Marty Rice.
935	+	//#define RACK_AND_PINION_PROBE
936	+	#if ENABLED(RACK_AND_PINION_PROBE)
937	+	#define Z_PROBE_DEPLOY_X X_MIN_POS
938	+	#define Z_PROBE_RETRACT_X X_MAX_POS
939	+	#endif
940	+
941	+	// Duet Smart Effector (for delta printers) - https://bit.ly/2ul5U7J
942	+	// When the pin is defined you can use M672 to set/reset the probe sensivity.
943	+	//#define DUET_SMART_EFFECTOR
944	+	#if ENABLED(DUET_SMART_EFFECTOR)
945	+	#define SMART_EFFECTOR_MOD_PIN -1 // Connect a GPIO pin to the Smart Effector MOD pin
946	+	#endif
947	+
948	+	/**
949	+	* Use StallGuard2 to probe the bed with the nozzle.
950	+	* Requires stallGuard-capable Trinamic stepper drivers.
951	+	* CAUTION: This can damage machines with Z lead screws.
952	+	* Take extreme care when setting up this feature.
953	+	*/
954	+	//#define SENSORLESS_PROBING
955	+
956	+	//
957	+	// For Z_PROBE_ALLEN_KEY see the Delta example configurations.
958	+	//
959	+
960	+	/**
961	+	* Nozzle-to-Probe offsets { X, Y, Z }
962	+	*
963	+	* - Use a caliper or ruler to measure the distance from the tip of
964	+	* the Nozzle to the center-point of the Probe in the X and Y axes.
965	+	* - For the Z offset use your best known value and adjust at runtime.
966	+	* - Probe Offsets can be tuned at runtime with 'M851', LCD menus, babystepping, etc.
967	+	*
968	+	* Assuming the typical work area orientation:
969	+	* - Probe to RIGHT of the Nozzle has a Positive X offset
970	+	* - Probe to LEFT of the Nozzle has a Negative X offset
971	+	* - Probe in BACK of the Nozzle has a Positive Y offset
972	+	* - Probe in FRONT of the Nozzle has a Negative Y offset
973	+	*
974	+	* Some examples:
975	+	* #define NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET { 10, 10, -1 } // Example "1"
976	+	* #define NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET {-10, 5, -1 } // Example "2"
977	+	* #define NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET { 5, -5, -1 } // Example "3"
978	+	* #define NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET {-15,-10, -1 } // Example "4"
979	+	*
980	+	* +-- BACK ---+
981	+	* \| [+] \|
982	+	* L \| 1 \| R <-- Example "1" (right+, back+)
983	+	* E \| 2 \| I <-- Example "2" ( left-, back+)
984	+	* F \|[-] N [+]\| G <-- Nozzle
985	+	* T \| 3 \| H <-- Example "3" (right+, front-)
986	+	* \| 4 \| T <-- Example "4" ( left-, front-)
987	+	* \| [-] \|
988	+	* O-- FRONT --+
989	+	*/
990	+	#define NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET { -42, -5, 0 }
991	+
992	+	// Most probes should stay away from the edges of the bed, but
993	+	// with NOZZLE_AS_PROBE this can be negative for a wider probing area.
994	+	#define PROBING_MARGIN 10
995	+
996	+	// X and Y axis travel speed (mm/min) between probes
997	+	#define XY_PROBE_SPEED (133*60)
998	+
999	+	// Feedrate (mm/min) for the first approach when double-probing (MULTIPLE_PROBING == 2)
1000	+	#define Z_PROBE_SPEED_FAST HOMING_FEEDRATE_Z
1001	+
1002	+	// Feedrate (mm/min) for the "accurate" probe of each point
1003	+	#define Z_PROBE_SPEED_SLOW (Z_PROBE_SPEED_FAST / 2)
1004	+
1005	+	/**
1006	+	* Multiple Probing
1007	+	*
1008	+	* You may get improved results by probing 2 or more times.
1009	+	* With EXTRA_PROBING the more atypical reading(s) will be disregarded.
1010	+	*
1011	+	* A total of 2 does fast/slow probes with a weighted average.
1012	+	* A total of 3 or more adds more slow probes, taking the average.
1013	+	*/
1014	+	#define MULTIPLE_PROBING 2
1015	+	//#define EXTRA_PROBING 1
1016	+
1017	+	/**
1018	+	* Z probes require clearance when deploying, stowing, and moving between
1019	+	* probe points to avoid hitting the bed and other hardware.
1020	+	* Servo-mounted probes require extra space for the arm to rotate.
1021	+	* Inductive probes need space to keep from triggering early.
1022	+	*
1023	+	* Use these settings to specify the distance (mm) to raise the probe (or
1024	+	* lower the bed). The values set here apply over and above any (negative)
1025	+	* probe Z Offset set with NOZZLE_TO_PROBE_OFFSET, M851, or the LCD.
1026	+	* Only integer values >= 1 are valid here.
1027	+	*
1028	+	* Example: `M851 Z-5` with a CLEARANCE of 4 => 9mm from bed to nozzle.
1029	+	* But: `M851 Z+1` with a CLEARANCE of 2 => 2mm from bed to nozzle.
1030	+	*/
1031	+	#define Z_CLEARANCE_DEPLOY_PROBE 10 // Z Clearance for Deploy/Stow
1032	+	#define Z_CLEARANCE_BETWEEN_PROBES 5 // Z Clearance between probe points
1033	+	#define Z_CLEARANCE_MULTI_PROBE 5 // Z Clearance between multiple probes
1034	+	#define Z_AFTER_PROBING 20 // Z position after probing is done
1035	+
1036	+	#define Z_PROBE_LOW_POINT -2 // Farthest distance below the trigger-point to go before stopping
1037	+
1038	+	// For M851 give a range for adjusting the Z probe offset
1039	+	#define Z_PROBE_OFFSET_RANGE_MIN -20
1040	+	#define Z_PROBE_OFFSET_RANGE_MAX 20
1041	+
1042	+	// Enable the M48 repeatability test to test probe accuracy
1043	+	//#define Z_MIN_PROBE_REPEATABILITY_TEST
1044	+
1045	+	// Before deploy/stow pause for user confirmation
1046	+	//#define PAUSE_BEFORE_DEPLOY_STOW
1047	+	#if ENABLED(PAUSE_BEFORE_DEPLOY_STOW)
1048	+	//#define PAUSE_PROBE_DEPLOY_WHEN_TRIGGERED // For Manual Deploy Allenkey Probe
1049	+	#endif
1050	+
1051	+	/**
1052	+	* Enable one or more of the following if probing seems unreliable.
1053	+	* Heaters and/or fans can be disabled during probing to minimize electrical
1054	+	* noise. A delay can also be added to allow noise and vibration to settle.
1055	+	* These options are most useful for the BLTouch probe, but may also improve
1056	+	* readings with inductive probes and piezo sensors.
1057	+	*/
1058	+	//#define PROBING_HEATERS_OFF // Turn heaters off when probing
1059	+	#if ENABLED(PROBING_HEATERS_OFF)
1060	+	//#define WAIT_FOR_BED_HEATER // Wait for bed to heat back up between probes (to improve accuracy)
1061	+	#endif
1062	+	//#define PROBING_FANS_OFF // Turn fans off when probing
1063	+	//#define PROBING_STEPPERS_OFF // Turn steppers off (unless needed to hold position) when probing
1064	+	//#define DELAY_BEFORE_PROBING 200 // (ms) To prevent vibrations from triggering piezo sensors
1065	+
1066	+	// For Inverting Stepper Enable Pins (Active Low) use 0, Non Inverting (Active High) use 1
1067	+	// :{ 0:'Low', 1:'High' }
1068	+	#define X_ENABLE_ON 0
1069	+	#define Y_ENABLE_ON 0
1070	+	#define Z_ENABLE_ON 0
1071	+	#define E_ENABLE_ON 0 // For all extruders
1072	+
1073	+	// Disable axis steppers immediately when they're not being stepped.
1074	+	// WARNING: When motors turn off there is a chance of losing position accuracy!
1075	+	#define DISABLE_X false
1076	+	#define DISABLE_Y false
1077	+	#define DISABLE_Z false
1078	+
1079	+	// Turn off the display blinking that warns about possible accuracy reduction
1080	+	//#define DISABLE_REDUCED_ACCURACY_WARNING
1081	+
1082	+	// @section extruder
1083	+
1084	+	#define DISABLE_E false // Disable the extruder when not stepping
1085	+	#define DISABLE_INACTIVE_EXTRUDER // Keep only the active extruder enabled
1086	+
1087	+	// @section machine
1088	+
1089	+	// Invert the stepper direction. Change (or reverse the motor connector) if an axis goes the wrong way.
1090	+	#define INVERT_X_DIR true
1091	+	#define INVERT_Y_DIR true
1092	+	#define INVERT_Z_DIR false
1093	+
1094	+	// @section extruder
1095	+
1096	+	// For direct drive extruder v9 set to true, for geared extruder set to false.
1097	+	#define INVERT_E0_DIR true
1098	+	#define INVERT_E1_DIR false
1099	+	#define INVERT_E2_DIR false
1100	+	#define INVERT_E3_DIR false
1101	+	#define INVERT_E4_DIR false
1102	+	#define INVERT_E5_DIR false
1103	+	#define INVERT_E6_DIR false
1104	+	#define INVERT_E7_DIR false
1105	+
1106	+	// @section homing
1107	+
1108	+	//#define NO_MOTION_BEFORE_HOMING // Inhibit movement until all axes have been homed
1109	+
1110	+	//#define UNKNOWN_Z_NO_RAISE // Don't raise Z (lower the bed) if Z is "unknown." For beds that fall when Z is powered off.
1111	+
1112	+	#define Z_HOMING_HEIGHT 20 // (mm) Minimal Z height before homing (G28) for Z clearance above the bed, clamps, ...
1113	+	// Be sure to have this much clearance over your Z_MAX_POS to prevent grinding.
1114	+
1115	+	//#define Z_AFTER_HOMING 10 // (mm) Height to move to after homing Z
1116	+
1117	+	// Direction of endstops when homing; 1=MAX, -1=MIN
1118	+	// :[-1,1]
1119	+	#define X_HOME_DIR -1
1120	+	#define Y_HOME_DIR -1
1121	+	#define Z_HOME_DIR -1
1122	+
1123	+	// @section machine
1124	+
1125	+	// The size of the print bed
1126	+	#define X_BED_SIZE 235
1127	+	#define Y_BED_SIZE 235
1128	+
1129	+	// Travel limits (mm) after homing, corresponding to endstop positions.
1130	+	#define X_MIN_POS 0
1131	+	#define Y_MIN_POS 0
1132	+	#define Z_MIN_POS 0
1133	+	#define X_MAX_POS X_BED_SIZE
1134	+	#define Y_MAX_POS Y_BED_SIZE
1135	+	#define Z_MAX_POS 250
1136	+
1137	+	/**
1138	+	* Software Endstops
1139	+	*
1140	+	* - Prevent moves outside the set machine bounds.
1141	+	* - Individual axes can be disabled, if desired.
1142	+	* - X and Y only apply to Cartesian robots.
1143	+	* - Use 'M211' to set software endstops on/off or report current state
1144	+	*/
1145	+
1146	+	// Min software endstops constrain movement within minimum coordinate bounds
1147	+	#define MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS
1148	+	#if ENABLED(MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS)
1149	+	#define MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_X
1150	+	#define MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_Y
1151	+	// #define MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_Z
1152	+	#endif
1153	+
1154	+	// Max software endstops constrain movement within maximum coordinate bounds
1155	+	#define MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS
1156	+	#if ENABLED(MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS)
1157	+	#define MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_X
1158	+	#define MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_Y
1159	+	#define MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOP_Z
1160	+	#endif
1161	+
1162	+	#if EITHER(MIN_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS, MAX_SOFTWARE_ENDSTOPS)
1163	+	//#define SOFT_ENDSTOPS_MENU_ITEM // Enable/Disable software endstops from the LCD
1164	+	#endif
1165	+
1166	+	/**
1167	+	* Filament Runout Sensors
1168	+	* Mechanical or opto endstops are used to check for the presence of filament.
1169	+	*
1170	+	* RAMPS-based boards use SERVO3_PIN for the first runout sensor.
1171	+	* For other boards you may need to define FIL_RUNOUT_PIN, FIL_RUNOUT2_PIN, etc.
1172	+	*/
1173	+	//#define FILAMENT_RUNOUT_SENSOR
1174	+	#if ENABLED(FILAMENT_RUNOUT_SENSOR)
1175	+	#define FIL_RUNOUT_ENABLED_DEFAULT true // Enable the sensor on startup. Override with M412 followed by M500.
1176	+	#define NUM_RUNOUT_SENSORS 1 // Number of sensors, up to one per extruder. Define a FIL_RUNOUT#_PIN for each.
1177	+	#define FIL_RUNOUT_STATE LOW // Pin state indicating that filament is NOT present.
1178	+	#define FIL_RUNOUT_PULLUP // Use internal pullup for filament runout pins.
1179	+	//#define FIL_RUNOUT_PULLDOWN // Use internal pulldown for filament runout pins.
1180	+
1181	+	// Set one or more commands to execute on filament runout.
1182	+	// (After 'M412 H' Marlin will ask the host to handle the process.)
1183	+	#define FILAMENT_RUNOUT_SCRIPT "M600"
1184	+
1185	+	// After a runout is detected, continue printing this length of filament
1186	+	// before executing the runout script. Useful for a sensor at the end of
1187	+	// a feed tube. Requires 4 bytes SRAM per sensor, plus 4 bytes overhead.
1188	+	//#define FILAMENT_RUNOUT_DISTANCE_MM 25
1189	+
1190	+	#ifdef FILAMENT_RUNOUT_DISTANCE_MM
1191	+	// Enable this option to use an encoder disc that toggles the runout pin
1192	+	// as the filament moves. (Be sure to set FILAMENT_RUNOUT_DISTANCE_MM
1193	+	// large enough to avoid false positives.)
1194	+	//#define FILAMENT_MOTION_SENSOR
1195	+	#endif
1196	+	#endif
1197	+
1198	+	//===========================================================================
1199	+	//=============================== Bed Leveling ==============================
1200	+	//===========================================================================
1201	+	// @section calibrate
1202	+
1203	+	/**
1204	+	* Choose one of the options below to enable G29 Bed Leveling. The parameters
1205	+	* and behavior of G29 will change depending on your selection.
1206	+	*
1207	+	* If using a Probe for Z Homing, enable Z_SAFE_HOMING also!
1208	+	*
1209	+	* - AUTO_BED_LEVELING_3POINT
1210	+	* Probe 3 arbitrary points on the bed (that aren't collinear)
1211	+	* You specify the XY coordinates of all 3 points.
1212	+	* The result is a single tilted plane. Best for a flat bed.
1213	+	*
1214	+	* - AUTO_BED_LEVELING_LINEAR
1215	+	* Probe several points in a grid.
1216	+	* You specify the rectangle and the density of sample points.
1217	+	* The result is a single tilted plane. Best for a flat bed.
1218	+	*
1219	+	* - AUTO_BED_LEVELING_BILINEAR
1220	+	* Probe several points in a grid.
1221	+	* You specify the rectangle and the density of sample points.
1222	+	* The result is a mesh, best for large or uneven beds.
1223	+	*
1224	+	* - AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL (Unified Bed Leveling)
1225	+	* A comprehensive bed leveling system combining the features and benefits
1226	+	* of other systems. UBL also includes integrated Mesh Generation, Mesh
1227	+	* Validation and Mesh Editing systems.
1228	+	*
1229	+	* - MESH_BED_LEVELING
1230	+	* Probe a grid manually
1231	+	* The result is a mesh, suitable for large or uneven beds. (See BILINEAR.)
1232	+	* For machines without a probe, Mesh Bed Leveling provides a method to perform
1233	+	* leveling in steps so you can manually adjust the Z height at each grid-point.
1234	+	* With an LCD controller the process is guided step-by-step.
1235	+	*/
1236	+	//#define AUTO_BED_LEVELING_3POINT
1237	+	//#define AUTO_BED_LEVELING_LINEAR
1238	+	#define AUTO_BED_LEVELING_BILINEAR
1239	+	//#define AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL
1240	+	//#define MESH_BED_LEVELING
1241	+
1242	+	/**
1243	+	* Normally G28 leaves leveling disabled on completion. Enable
1244	+	* this option to have G28 restore the prior leveling state.
1245	+	*/
1246	+	#define RESTORE_LEVELING_AFTER_G28
1247	+
1248	+	/**
1249	+	* Enable detailed logging of G28, G29, M48, etc.
1250	+	* Turn on with the command 'M111 S32'.
1251	+	* NOTE: Requires a lot of PROGMEM!
1252	+	*/
1253	+	//#define DEBUG_LEVELING_FEATURE
1254	+
1255	+	#if ANY(MESH_BED_LEVELING, AUTO_BED_LEVELING_BILINEAR, AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL)
1256	+	// Gradually reduce leveling correction until a set height is reached,
1257	+	// at which point movement will be level to the machine's XY plane.
1258	+	// The height can be set with M420 Z<height>
1259	+	#define ENABLE_LEVELING_FADE_HEIGHT
1260	+
1261	+	// For Cartesian machines, instead of dividing moves on mesh boundaries,
1262	+	// split up moves into short segments like a Delta. This follows the
1263	+	// contours of the bed more closely than edge-to-edge straight moves.
1264	+	#define SEGMENT_LEVELED_MOVES
1265	+	#define LEVELED_SEGMENT_LENGTH 5.0 // (mm) Length of all segments (except the last one)
1266	+
1267	+	/**
1268	+	* Enable the G26 Mesh Validation Pattern tool.
1269	+	*/
1270	+	//#define G26_MESH_VALIDATION
1271	+	#if ENABLED(G26_MESH_VALIDATION)
1272	+	#define MESH_TEST_NOZZLE_SIZE 0.4 // (mm) Diameter of primary nozzle.
1273	+	#define MESH_TEST_LAYER_HEIGHT 0.2 // (mm) Default layer height for the G26 Mesh Validation Tool.
1274	+	#define MESH_TEST_HOTEND_TEMP 205 // (°C) Default nozzle temperature for the G26 Mesh Validation Tool.
1275	+	#define MESH_TEST_BED_TEMP 60 // (°C) Default bed temperature for the G26 Mesh Validation Tool.
1276	+	#define G26_XY_FEEDRATE 20 // (mm/s) Feedrate for XY Moves for the G26 Mesh Validation Tool.
1277	+	#define G26_RETRACT_MULTIPLIER 1.0 // G26 Q (retraction) used by default between mesh test elements.
1278	+	#endif
1279	+
1280	+	#endif
1281	+
1282	+	#if EITHER(AUTO_BED_LEVELING_LINEAR, AUTO_BED_LEVELING_BILINEAR)
1283	+
1284	+	// Set the number of grid points per dimension.
1285	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_X 5
1286	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_Y GRID_MAX_POINTS_X
1287	+
1288	+	// Probe along the Y axis, advancing X after each column
1289	+	//#define PROBE_Y_FIRST
1290	+
1291	+	#if ENABLED(AUTO_BED_LEVELING_BILINEAR)
1292	+
1293	+	// Beyond the probed grid, continue the implied tilt?
1294	+	// Default is to maintain the height of the nearest edge.
1295	+	//#define EXTRAPOLATE_BEYOND_GRID
1296	+
1297	+	//
1298	+	// Experimental Subdivision of the grid by Catmull-Rom method.
1299	+	// Synthesizes intermediate points to produce a more detailed mesh.
1300	+	//
1301	+	//#define ABL_BILINEAR_SUBDIVISION
1302	+	#if ENABLED(ABL_BILINEAR_SUBDIVISION)
1303	+	// Number of subdivisions between probe points
1304	+	#define BILINEAR_SUBDIVISIONS 3
1305	+	#endif
1306	+
1307	+	#endif
1308	+
1309	+	#elif ENABLED(AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL)
1310	+
1311	+	//===========================================================================
1312	+	//========================= Unified Bed Leveling ============================
1313	+	//===========================================================================
1314	+
1315	+	//#define MESH_EDIT_GFX_OVERLAY // Display a graphics overlay while editing the mesh
1316	+
1317	+	#define MESH_INSET 1 // Set Mesh bounds as an inset region of the bed
1318	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_X 10 // Don't use more than 15 points per axis, implementation limited.
1319	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_Y GRID_MAX_POINTS_X
1320	+
1321	+	#define UBL_MESH_EDIT_MOVES_Z // Sophisticated users prefer no movement of nozzle
1322	+	#define UBL_SAVE_ACTIVE_ON_M500 // Save the currently active mesh in the current slot on M500
1323	+
1324	+	//#define UBL_Z_RAISE_WHEN_OFF_MESH 2.5 // When the nozzle is off the mesh, this value is used
1325	+	// as the Z-Height correction value.
1326	+
1327	+	#elif ENABLED(MESH_BED_LEVELING)
1328	+
1329	+	//===========================================================================
1330	+	//=================================== Mesh ==================================
1331	+	//===========================================================================
1332	+
1333	+	#define MESH_INSET 10 // Set Mesh bounds as an inset region of the bed
1334	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_X 3 // Don't use more than 7 points per axis, implementation limited.
1335	+	#define GRID_MAX_POINTS_Y GRID_MAX_POINTS_X
1336	+
1337	+	//#define MESH_G28_REST_ORIGIN // After homing all axes ('G28' or 'G28 XYZ') rest Z at Z_MIN_POS
1338	+
1339	+	#endif // BED_LEVELING
1340	+
1341	+	/**
1342	+	* Add a bed leveling sub-menu for ABL or MBL.
1343	+	* Include a guided procedure if manual probing is enabled.
1344	+	*/
1345	+	#define LCD_BED_LEVELING
1346	+
1347	+	#if ENABLED(LCD_BED_LEVELING)
1348	+	#define MESH_EDIT_Z_STEP 0.02 // (mm) Step size while manually probing Z axis.
1349	+	#define LCD_PROBE_Z_RANGE 4 // (mm) Z Range centered on Z_MIN_POS for LCD Z adjustment
1350	+	//#define MESH_EDIT_MENU // Add a menu to edit mesh points
1351	+	#endif
1352	+
1353	+	// Add a menu item to move between bed corners for manual bed adjustment
1354	+	//#define LEVEL_BED_CORNERS
1355	+
1356	+	#if ENABLED(LEVEL_BED_CORNERS)
1357	+	#define LEVEL_CORNERS_INSET_LFRB { 30, 30, 30, 30 } // (mm) Left, Front, Right, Back insets
1358	+	#define LEVEL_CORNERS_HEIGHT 0.0 // (mm) Z height of nozzle at leveling points
1359	+	#define LEVEL_CORNERS_Z_HOP 4.0 // (mm) Z height of nozzle between leveling points
1360	+	//#define LEVEL_CENTER_TOO // Move to the center after the last corner
1361	+	#endif
1362	+
1363	+	/**
1364	+	* Commands to execute at the end of G29 probing.
1365	+	* Useful to retract or move the Z probe out of the way.
1366	+	*/
1367	+	//#define Z_PROBE_END_SCRIPT "G1 Z10 F12000\nG1 X15 Y330\nG1 Z0.5\nG1 Z10"
1368	+
1369	+	// @section homing
1370	+
1371	+	// The center of the bed is at (X=0, Y=0)
1372	+	//#define BED_CENTER_AT_0_0
1373	+
1374	+	// Manually set the home position. Leave these undefined for automatic settings.
1375	+	// For DELTA this is the top-center of the Cartesian print volume.
1376	+	//#define MANUAL_X_HOME_POS 0
1377	+	//#define MANUAL_Y_HOME_POS 0
1378	+	//#define MANUAL_Z_HOME_POS 0
1379	+
1380	+	// Use "Z Safe Homing" to avoid homing with a Z probe outside the bed area.
1381	+	//
1382	+	// With this feature enabled:
1383	+	//
1384	+	// - Allow Z homing only after X and Y homing AND stepper drivers still enabled.
1385	+	// - If stepper drivers time out, it will need X and Y homing again before Z homing.
1386	+	// - Move the Z probe (or nozzle) to a defined XY point before Z Homing.
1387	+	// - Prevent Z homing when the Z probe is outside bed area.
1388	+	//
1389	+	#define Z_SAFE_HOMING
1390	+
1391	+	#if ENABLED(Z_SAFE_HOMING)
1392	+	#define Z_SAFE_HOMING_X_POINT ((X_BED_SIZE) / 2) // X point for Z homing
1393	+	#define Z_SAFE_HOMING_Y_POINT ((Y_BED_SIZE) / 2) // Y point for Z homing
1394	+	#endif
1395	+
1396	+	// Homing speeds (mm/min)
1397	+	#define HOMING_FEEDRATE_XY (40*60)
1398	+	#define HOMING_FEEDRATE_Z (8*60)
1399	+
1400	+	// Validate that endstops are triggered on homing moves
1401	+	#define VALIDATE_HOMING_ENDSTOPS
1402	+
1403	+	// @section calibrate
1404	+
1405	+	/**
1406	+	* Bed Skew Compensation
1407	+	*
1408	+	* This feature corrects for misalignment in the XYZ axes.
1409	+	*
1410	+	* Take the following steps to get the bed skew in the XY plane:
1411	+	* 1. Print a test square (e.g., https://www.thingiverse.com/thing:2563185)
1412	+	* 2. For XY_DIAG_AC measure the diagonal A to C
1413	+	* 3. For XY_DIAG_BD measure the diagonal B to D
1414	+	* 4. For XY_SIDE_AD measure the edge A to D
1415	+	*
1416	+	* Marlin automatically computes skew factors from these measurements.
1417	+	* Skew factors may also be computed and set manually:
1418	+	*
1419	+	* - Compute AB : SQRT(2ACAC+2BDBD-4ADAD)/2
1420	+	* - XY_SKEW_FACTOR : TAN(PI/2-ACOS((ACAC-ABAB-ADAD)/(2AB*AD)))
1421	+	*
1422	+	* If desired, follow the same procedure for XZ and YZ.
1423	+	* Use these diagrams for reference:
1424	+	*
1425	+	* Y Z Z
1426	+	* ^ B-------C ^ B-------C ^ B-------C
1427	+	* \| / / \| / / \| / /
1428	+	* \| / / \| / / \| / /
1429	+	* \| A-------D \| A-------D \| A-------D
1430	+	* +-------------->X +-------------->X +-------------->Y
1431	+	* XY_SKEW_FACTOR XZ_SKEW_FACTOR YZ_SKEW_FACTOR
1432	+	*/
1433	+	//#define SKEW_CORRECTION
1434	+
1435	+	#if ENABLED(SKEW_CORRECTION)
1436	+	// Input all length measurements here:
1437	+	#define XY_DIAG_AC 282.8427124746
1438	+	#define XY_DIAG_BD 282.8427124746
1439	+	#define XY_SIDE_AD 200
1440	+
1441	+	// Or, set the default skew factors directly here
1442	+	// to override the above measurements:
1443	+	#define XY_SKEW_FACTOR 0.0
1444	+
1445	+	//#define SKEW_CORRECTION_FOR_Z
1446	+	#if ENABLED(SKEW_CORRECTION_FOR_Z)
1447	+	#define XZ_DIAG_AC 282.8427124746
1448	+	#define XZ_DIAG_BD 282.8427124746
1449	+	#define YZ_DIAG_AC 282.8427124746
1450	+	#define YZ_DIAG_BD 282.8427124746
1451	+	#define YZ_SIDE_AD 200
1452	+	#define XZ_SKEW_FACTOR 0.0
1453	+	#define YZ_SKEW_FACTOR 0.0
1454	+	#endif
1455	+
1456	+	// Enable this option for M852 to set skew at runtime
1457	+	//#define SKEW_CORRECTION_GCODE
1458	+	#endif
1459	+
1460	+	//=============================================================================
1461	+	//============================= Additional Features ===========================
1462	+	//=============================================================================
1463	+
1464	+	// @section extras
1465	+
1466	+	/**
1467	+	* EEPROM
1468	+	*
1469	+	* Persistent storage to preserve configurable settings across reboots.
1470	+	*
1471	+	* M500 - Store settings to EEPROM.
1472	+	* M501 - Read settings from EEPROM. (i.e., Throw away unsaved changes)
1473	+	* M502 - Revert settings to "factory" defaults. (Follow with M500 to init the EEPROM.)
1474	+	*/
1475	+	#define EEPROM_SETTINGS // Persistent storage with M500 and M501
1476	+	//#define DISABLE_M503 // Saves ~2700 bytes of PROGMEM. Disable for release!
1477	+	#define EEPROM_CHITCHAT // Give feedback on EEPROM commands. Disable to save PROGMEM.
1478	+	#define EEPROM_BOOT_SILENT // Keep M503 quiet and only give errors during first load
1479	+	#if ENABLED(EEPROM_SETTINGS)
1480	+	//#define EEPROM_AUTO_INIT // Init EEPROM automatically on any errors.
1481	+	#endif
1482	+
1483	+	//
1484	+	// Host Keepalive
1485	+	//
1486	+	// When enabled Marlin will send a busy status message to the host
1487	+	// every couple of seconds when it can't accept commands.
1488	+	//
1489	+	#define HOST_KEEPALIVE_FEATURE // Disable this if your host doesn't like keepalive messages
1490	+	#define DEFAULT_KEEPALIVE_INTERVAL 2 // Number of seconds between "busy" messages. Set with M113.
1491	+	#define BUSY_WHILE_HEATING // Some hosts require "busy" messages even during heating
1492	+
1493	+	//
1494	+	// G20/G21 Inch mode support
1495	+	//
1496	+	//#define INCH_MODE_SUPPORT
1497	+
1498	+	//
1499	+	// M149 Set temperature units support
1500	+	//
1501	+	//#define TEMPERATURE_UNITS_SUPPORT
1502	+
1503	+	// @section temperature
1504	+
1505	+	// Preheat Constants
1506	+	#define PREHEAT_1_LABEL "PLA"
1507	+	#define PREHEAT_1_TEMP_HOTEND 200
1508	+	#define PREHEAT_1_TEMP_BED 70
1509	+	#define PREHEAT_1_FAN_SPEED 0 // Value from 0 to 255
1510	+
1511	+	#define PREHEAT_2_LABEL "ABS"
1512	+	#define PREHEAT_2_TEMP_HOTEND 240
1513	+	#define PREHEAT_2_TEMP_BED 110
1514	+	#define PREHEAT_2_FAN_SPEED 0 // Value from 0 to 255
1515	+
1516	+	/**
1517	+	* Nozzle Park
1518	+	*
1519	+	* Park the nozzle at the given XYZ position on idle or G27.
1520	+	*
1521	+	* The "P" parameter controls the action applied to the Z axis:
1522	+	*
1523	+	* P0 (Default) If Z is below park Z raise the nozzle.
1524	+	* P1 Raise the nozzle always to Z-park height.
1525	+	* P2 Raise the nozzle by Z-park amount, limited to Z_MAX_POS.
1526	+	*/
1527	+	//#define NOZZLE_PARK_FEATURE
1528	+
1529	+	#if ENABLED(NOZZLE_PARK_FEATURE)
1530	+	// Specify a park position as { X, Y, Z_raise }
1531	+	#define NOZZLE_PARK_POINT { (X_MIN_POS + 10), (Y_MAX_POS - 10), 20 }
1532	+	//#define NOZZLE_PARK_X_ONLY // X move only is required to park
1533	+	//#define NOZZLE_PARK_Y_ONLY // Y move only is required to park
1534	+	#define NOZZLE_PARK_Z_RAISE_MIN 2 // (mm) Always raise Z by at least this distance
1535	+	#define NOZZLE_PARK_XY_FEEDRATE 100 // (mm/s) X and Y axes feedrate (also used for delta Z axis)
1536	+	#define NOZZLE_PARK_Z_FEEDRATE 5 // (mm/s) Z axis feedrate (not used for delta printers)
1537	+	#endif
1538	+
1539	+	/**
1540	+	* Clean Nozzle Feature -- EXPERIMENTAL
1541	+	*
1542	+	* Adds the G12 command to perform a nozzle cleaning process.
1543	+	*
1544	+	* Parameters:
1545	+	* P Pattern
1546	+	* S Strokes / Repetitions
1547	+	* T Triangles (P1 only)
1548	+	*
1549	+	* Patterns:
1550	+	* P0 Straight line (default). This process requires a sponge type material
1551	+	* at a fixed bed location. "S" specifies strokes (i.e. back-forth motions)
1552	+	* between the start / end points.
1553	+	*
1554	+	* P1 Zig-zag pattern between (X0, Y0) and (X1, Y1), "T" specifies the
1555	+	* number of zig-zag triangles to do. "S" defines the number of strokes.
1556	+	* Zig-zags are done in whichever is the narrower dimension.
1557	+	* For example, "G12 P1 S1 T3" will execute:
1558	+	*
1559	+	* --
1560	+	* \| (X0, Y1) \| /\ /\ /\ \| (X1, Y1)
1561	+	* \| \| / \ / \ / \ \|
1562	+	* A \| \| / \ / \ / \ \|
1563	+	* \| \| / \ / \ / \ \|
1564	+	* \| (X0, Y0) \| / \/ \/ \ \| (X1, Y0)
1565	+	* -- +--------------------------------+
1566	+	* \|________\|_________\|_________\|
1567	+	* T1 T2 T3
1568	+	*
1569	+	* P2 Circular pattern with middle at NOZZLE_CLEAN_CIRCLE_MIDDLE.
1570	+	* "R" specifies the radius. "S" specifies the stroke count.
1571	+	* Before starting, the nozzle moves to NOZZLE_CLEAN_START_POINT.
1572	+	*
1573	+	* Caveats: The ending Z should be the same as starting Z.
1574	+	* Attention: EXPERIMENTAL. G-code arguments may change.
1575	+	*/
1576	+	//#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_FEATURE
1577	+
1578	+	#if ENABLED(NOZZLE_CLEAN_FEATURE)
1579	+	// Default number of pattern repetitions
1580	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_STROKES 12
1581	+
1582	+	// Default number of triangles
1583	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_TRIANGLES 3
1584	+
1585	+	// Specify positions for each tool as { { X, Y, Z }, { X, Y, Z } }
1586	+	// Dual hotend system may use { { -20, (Y_BED_SIZE / 2), (Z_MIN_POS + 1) }, { 420, (Y_BED_SIZE / 2), (Z_MIN_POS + 1) }}
1587	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_START_POINT { { 30, 30, (Z_MIN_POS + 1) } }
1588	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_END_POINT { { 100, 60, (Z_MIN_POS + 1) } }
1589	+
1590	+	// Circular pattern radius
1591	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_CIRCLE_RADIUS 6.5
1592	+	// Circular pattern circle fragments number
1593	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_CIRCLE_FN 10
1594	+	// Middle point of circle
1595	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_CIRCLE_MIDDLE NOZZLE_CLEAN_START_POINT
1596	+
1597	+	// Move the nozzle to the initial position after cleaning
1598	+	#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_GOBACK
1599	+
1600	+	// For a purge/clean station that's always at the gantry height (thus no Z move)
1601	+	//#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_NO_Z
1602	+
1603	+	// For a purge/clean station mounted on the X axis
1604	+	//#define NOZZLE_CLEAN_NO_Y
1605	+
1606	+	// Explicit wipe G-code script applies to a G12 with no arguments.
1607	+	//#define WIPE_SEQUENCE_COMMANDS "G1 X-17 Y25 Z10 F4000\nG1 Z1\nM114\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 X-17 Y25\nG1 X-17 Y95\nG1 Z15\nM400\nG0 X-10.0 Y-9.0"
1608	+
1609	+	#endif
1610	+
1611	+	/**
1612	+	* Print Job Timer
1613	+	*
1614	+	* Automatically start and stop the print job timer on M104/M109/M190.
1615	+	*
1616	+	* M104 (hotend, no wait) - high temp = none, low temp = stop timer
1617	+	* M109 (hotend, wait) - high temp = start timer, low temp = stop timer
1618	+	* M190 (bed, wait) - high temp = start timer, low temp = none
1619	+	*
1620	+	* The timer can also be controlled with the following commands:
1621	+	*
1622	+	* M75 - Start the print job timer
1623	+	* M76 - Pause the print job timer
1624	+	* M77 - Stop the print job timer
1625	+	*/
1626	+	#define PRINTJOB_TIMER_AUTOSTART
1627	+
1628	+	/**
1629	+	* Print Counter
1630	+	*
1631	+	* Track statistical data such as:
1632	+	*
1633	+	* - Total print jobs
1634	+	* - Total successful print jobs
1635	+	* - Total failed print jobs
1636	+	* - Total time printing
1637	+	*
1638	+	* View the current statistics with M78.
1639	+	*/
1640	+	//#define PRINTCOUNTER
1641	+
1642	+	/**
1643	+	* Password
1644	+	*
1645	+	* Set a numerical password for the printer which can be requested:
1646	+	*
1647	+	* - When the printer boots up
1648	+	* - Upon opening the 'Print from Media' Menu
1649	+	* - When SD printing is completed or aborted
1650	+	*
1651	+	* The following G-codes can be used:
1652	+	*
1653	+	* M510 - Lock Printer. Blocks all commands except M511.
1654	+	* M511 - Unlock Printer.
1655	+	* M512 - Set, Change and Remove Password.
1656	+	*
1657	+	* If you forget the password and get locked out you'll need to re-flash
1658	+	* the firmware with the feature disabled, reset EEPROM, and (optionally)
1659	+	* re-flash the firmware again with this feature enabled.
1660	+	*/
1661	+	//#define PASSWORD_FEATURE
1662	+	#if ENABLED(PASSWORD_FEATURE)
1663	+	#define PASSWORD_LENGTH 4 // (#) Number of digits (1-9). 3 or 4 is recommended
1664	+	#define PASSWORD_ON_STARTUP
1665	+	#define PASSWORD_UNLOCK_GCODE // Unlock with the M511 P<password> command. Disable to prevent brute-force attack.
1666	+	#define PASSWORD_CHANGE_GCODE // Change the password with M512 P<old> S<new>.
1667	+	//#define PASSWORD_ON_SD_PRINT_MENU // This does not prevent gcodes from running
1668	+	//#define PASSWORD_AFTER_SD_PRINT_END
1669	+	//#define PASSWORD_AFTER_SD_PRINT_ABORT
1670	+	//#include "Configuration_Secure.h" // External file with PASSWORD_DEFAULT_VALUE
1671	+	#endif
1672	+
1673	+	//=============================================================================
1674	+	//============================= LCD and SD support ============================
1675	+	//=============================================================================
1676	+
1677	+	// @section lcd
1678	+
1679	+	/**
1680	+	* LCD LANGUAGE
1681	+	*
1682	+	* Select the language to display on the LCD. These languages are available:
1683	+	*
1684	+	* en, an, bg, ca, cz, da, de, el, el_gr, es, eu, fi, fr, gl, hr, hu, it,
1685	+	* jp_kana, ko_KR, nl, pl, pt, pt_br, ro, ru, sk, tr, uk, vi, zh_CN, zh_TW, test
1686	+	*
1687	+	* :{ 'en':'English', 'an':'Aragonese', 'bg':'Bulgarian', 'ca':'Catalan', 'cz':'Czech', 'da':'Danish', 'de':'German', 'el':'Greek', 'el_gr':'Greek (Greece)', 'es':'Spanish', 'eu':'Basque-Euskera', 'fi':'Finnish', 'fr':'French', 'gl':'Galician', 'hr':'Croatian', 'hu':'Hungarian', 'it':'Italian', 'jp_kana':'Japanese', 'ko_KR':'Korean (South Korea)', 'nl':'Dutch', 'pl':'Polish', 'pt':'Portuguese', 'pt_br':'Portuguese (Brazilian)', 'ro':'Romanian', 'ru':'Russian', 'sk':'Slovak', 'tr':'Turkish', 'uk':'Ukrainian', 'vi':'Vietnamese', 'zh_CN':'Chinese (Simplified)', 'zh_TW':'Chinese (Traditional)', 'test':'TEST' }
1688	+	*/
1689	+	#define LCD_LANGUAGE en
1690	+
1691	+	/**
1692	+	* LCD Character Set
1693	+	*
1694	+	* Note: This option is NOT applicable to Graphical Displays.
1695	+	*
1696	+	* All character-based LCDs provide ASCII plus one of these
1697	+	* language extensions:
1698	+	*
1699	+	* - JAPANESE ... the most common
1700	+	* - WESTERN ... with more accented characters
1701	+	* - CYRILLIC ... for the Russian language
1702	+	*
1703	+	* To determine the language extension installed on your controller:
1704	+	*
1705	+	* - Compile and upload with LCD_LANGUAGE set to 'test'
1706	+	* - Click the controller to view the LCD menu
1707	+	* - The LCD will display Japanese, Western, or Cyrillic text
1708	+	*
1709	+	* See https://marlinfw.org/docs/development/lcd_language.html
1710	+	*
1711	+	* :['JAPANESE', 'WESTERN', 'CYRILLIC']
1712	+	*/
1713	+	#define DISPLAY_CHARSET_HD44780 WESTERN
1714	+
1715	+	/**
1716	+	* Info Screen Style (0:Classic, 1:Průša)
1717	+	*
1718	+	* :[0:'Classic', 1:'Průša']
1719	+	*/
1720	+	#define LCD_INFO_SCREEN_STYLE 0
1721	+
1722	+	/**
1723	+	* SD CARD
1724	+	*
1725	+	* SD Card support is disabled by default. If your controller has an SD slot,
1726	+	* you must uncomment the following option or it won't work.
1727	+	*/
1728	+	#define SDSUPPORT
1729	+
1730	+	/**
1731	+	* SD CARD: SPI SPEED
1732	+	*
1733	+	* Enable one of the following items for a slower SPI transfer speed.
1734	+	* This may be required to resolve "volume init" errors.
1735	+	*/
1736	+	//#define SPI_SPEED SPI_HALF_SPEED
1737	+	//#define SPI_SPEED SPI_QUARTER_SPEED
1738	+	//#define SPI_SPEED SPI_EIGHTH_SPEED
1739	+
1740	+	/**
1741	+	* SD CARD: ENABLE CRC
1742	+	*
1743	+	* Use CRC checks and retries on the SD communication.
1744	+	*/
1745	+	//#define SD_CHECK_AND_RETRY
1746	+
1747	+	/**
1748	+	* LCD Menu Items
1749	+	*
1750	+	* Disable all menus and only display the Status Screen, or
1751	+	* just remove some extraneous menu items to recover space.
1752	+	*/
1753	+	//#define NO_LCD_MENUS
1754	+	//#define SLIM_LCD_MENUS
1755	+
1756	+	//
1757	+	// ENCODER SETTINGS
1758	+	//
1759	+	// This option overrides the default number of encoder pulses needed to
1760	+	// produce one step. Should be increased for high-resolution encoders.
1761	+	//
1762	+	//#define ENCODER_PULSES_PER_STEP 4
1763	+
1764	+	//
1765	+	// Use this option to override the number of step signals required to
1766	+	// move between next/prev menu items.
1767	+	//
1768	+	//#define ENCODER_STEPS_PER_MENU_ITEM 1
1769	+
1770	+	/**
1771	+	* Encoder Direction Options
1772	+	*
1773	+	* Test your encoder's behavior first with both options disabled.
1774	+	*
1775	+	* Reversed Value Edit and Menu Nav? Enable REVERSE_ENCODER_DIRECTION.
1776	+	* Reversed Menu Navigation only? Enable REVERSE_MENU_DIRECTION.
1777	+	* Reversed Value Editing only? Enable BOTH options.
1778	+	*/
1779	+
1780	+	//
1781	+	// This option reverses the encoder direction everywhere.
1782	+	//
1783	+	// Set this option if CLOCKWISE causes values to DECREASE
1784	+	//
1785	+	//#define REVERSE_ENCODER_DIRECTION
1786	+
1787	+	//
1788	+	// This option reverses the encoder direction for navigating LCD menus.
1789	+	//
1790	+	// If CLOCKWISE normally moves DOWN this makes it go UP.
1791	+	// If CLOCKWISE normally moves UP this makes it go DOWN.
1792	+	//
1793	+	//#define REVERSE_MENU_DIRECTION
1794	+
1795	+	//
1796	+	// This option reverses the encoder direction for Select Screen.
1797	+	//
1798	+	// If CLOCKWISE normally moves LEFT this makes it go RIGHT.
1799	+	// If CLOCKWISE normally moves RIGHT this makes it go LEFT.
1800	+	//
1801	+	//#define REVERSE_SELECT_DIRECTION
1802	+
1803	+	//
1804	+	// Individual Axis Homing
1805	+	//
1806	+	// Add individual axis homing items (Home X, Home Y, and Home Z) to the LCD menu.
1807	+	//
1808	+	//#define INDIVIDUAL_AXIS_HOMING_MENU
1809	+
1810	+	//
1811	+	// SPEAKER/BUZZER
1812	+	//
1813	+	// If you have a speaker that can produce tones, enable it here.
1814	+	// By default Marlin assumes you have a buzzer with a fixed frequency.
1815	+	//
1816	+	#define SPEAKER
1817	+
1818	+	//
1819	+	// The duration and frequency for the UI feedback sound.
1820	+	// Set these to 0 to disable audio feedback in the LCD menus.
1821	+	//
1822	+	// Note: Test audio output with the G-Code:
1823	+	// M300 S<frequency Hz> P<duration ms>
1824	+	//
1825	+	//#define LCD_FEEDBACK_FREQUENCY_DURATION_MS 2
1826	+	//#define LCD_FEEDBACK_FREQUENCY_HZ 5000
1827	+
1828	+	//=============================================================================
1829	+	//======================== LCD / Controller Selection =========================
1830	+	//======================== (Character-based LCDs) =========================
1831	+	//=============================================================================
1832	+
1833	+	//
1834	+	// RepRapDiscount Smart Controller.
1835	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/RepRapDiscount_Smart_Controller
1836	+	//
1837	+	// Note: Usually sold with a white PCB.
1838	+	//
1839	+	//#define REPRAP_DISCOUNT_SMART_CONTROLLER
1840	+
1841	+	//
1842	+	// Original RADDS LCD Display+Encoder+SDCardReader
1843	+	// http://doku.radds.org/dokumentation/lcd-display/
1844	+	//
1845	+	//#define RADDS_DISPLAY
1846	+
1847	+	//
1848	+	// ULTIMAKER Controller.
1849	+	//
1850	+	//#define ULTIMAKERCONTROLLER
1851	+
1852	+	//
1853	+	// ULTIPANEL as seen on Thingiverse.
1854	+	//
1855	+	//#define ULTIPANEL
1856	+
1857	+	//
1858	+	// PanelOne from T3P3 (via RAMPS 1.4 AUX2/AUX3)
1859	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/PanelOne
1860	+	//
1861	+	//#define PANEL_ONE
1862	+
1863	+	//
1864	+	// GADGETS3D G3D LCD/SD Controller
1865	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/RAMPS_1.3/1.4_GADGETS3D_Shield_with_Panel
1866	+	//
1867	+	// Note: Usually sold with a blue PCB.
1868	+	//
1869	+	//#define G3D_PANEL
1870	+
1871	+	//
1872	+	// RigidBot Panel V1.0
1873	+	// http://www.inventapart.com/
1874	+	//
1875	+	//#define RIGIDBOT_PANEL
1876	+
1877	+	//
1878	+	// Makeboard 3D Printer Parts 3D Printer Mini Display 1602 Mini Controller
1879	+	// https://www.aliexpress.com/item/32765887917.html
1880	+	//
1881	+	//#define MAKEBOARD_MINI_2_LINE_DISPLAY_1602
1882	+
1883	+	//
1884	+	// ANET and Tronxy 20x4 Controller
1885	+	//
1886	+	//#define ZONESTAR_LCD // Requires ADC_KEYPAD_PIN to be assigned to an analog pin.
1887	+	// This LCD is known to be susceptible to electrical interference
1888	+	// which scrambles the display. Pressing any button clears it up.
1889	+	// This is a LCD2004 display with 5 analog buttons.
1890	+
1891	+	//
1892	+	// Generic 16x2, 16x4, 20x2, or 20x4 character-based LCD.
1893	+	//
1894	+	//#define ULTRA_LCD
1895	+
1896	+	//=============================================================================
1897	+	//======================== LCD / Controller Selection =========================
1898	+	//===================== (I2C and Shift-Register LCDs) =====================
1899	+	//=============================================================================
1900	+
1901	+	//
1902	+	// CONTROLLER TYPE: I2C
1903	+	//
1904	+	// Note: These controllers require the installation of Arduino's LiquidCrystal_I2C
1905	+	// library. For more info: https://github.com/kiyoshigawa/LiquidCrystal_I2C
1906	+	//
1907	+
1908	+	//
1909	+	// Elefu RA Board Control Panel
1910	+	// http://www.elefu.com/index.php?route=product/product&product_id=53
1911	+	//
1912	+	//#define RA_CONTROL_PANEL
1913	+
1914	+	//
1915	+	// Sainsmart (YwRobot) LCD Displays
1916	+	//
1917	+	// These require F.Malpartida's LiquidCrystal_I2C library
1918	+	// https://bitbucket.org/fmalpartida/new-liquidcrystal/wiki/Home
1919	+	//
1920	+	//#define LCD_SAINSMART_I2C_1602
1921	+	//#define LCD_SAINSMART_I2C_2004
1922	+
1923	+	//
1924	+	// Generic LCM1602 LCD adapter
1925	+	//
1926	+	//#define LCM1602
1927	+
1928	+	//
1929	+	// PANELOLU2 LCD with status LEDs,
1930	+	// separate encoder and click inputs.
1931	+	//
1932	+	// Note: This controller requires Arduino's LiquidTWI2 library v1.2.3 or later.
1933	+	// For more info: https://github.com/lincomatic/LiquidTWI2
1934	+	//
1935	+	// Note: The PANELOLU2 encoder click input can either be directly connected to
1936	+	// a pin (if BTN_ENC defined to != -1) or read through I2C (when BTN_ENC == -1).
1937	+	//
1938	+	//#define LCD_I2C_PANELOLU2
1939	+
1940	+	//
1941	+	// Panucatt VIKI LCD with status LEDs,
1942	+	// integrated click & L/R/U/D buttons, separate encoder inputs.
1943	+	//
1944	+	//#define LCD_I2C_VIKI
1945	+
1946	+	//
1947	+	// CONTROLLER TYPE: Shift register panels
1948	+	//
1949	+
1950	+	//
1951	+	// 2-wire Non-latching LCD SR from https://goo.gl/aJJ4sH
1952	+	// LCD configuration: https://reprap.org/wiki/SAV_3D_LCD
1953	+	//
1954	+	//#define SAV_3DLCD
1955	+
1956	+	//
1957	+	// 3-wire SR LCD with strobe using 74HC4094
1958	+	// https://github.com/mikeshub/SailfishLCD
1959	+	// Uses the code directly from Sailfish
1960	+	//
1961	+	//#define FF_INTERFACEBOARD
1962	+
1963	+	//
1964	+	// TFT GLCD Panel with Marlin UI
1965	+	// Panel connected to main board by SPI or I2C interface.
1966	+	// See https://github.com/Serhiy-K/TFTGLCDAdapter
1967	+	//
1968	+	//#define TFTGLCD_PANEL_SPI
1969	+	//#define TFTGLCD_PANEL_I2C
1970	+
1971	+	//=============================================================================
1972	+	//======================= LCD / Controller Selection =======================
1973	+	//========================= (Graphical LCDs) ========================
1974	+	//=============================================================================
1975	+
1976	+	//
1977	+	// CONTROLLER TYPE: Graphical 128x64 (DOGM)
1978	+	//
1979	+	// IMPORTANT: The U8glib library is required for Graphical Display!
1980	+	// https://github.com/olikraus/U8glib_Arduino
1981	+	//
1982	+	// NOTE: If the LCD is unresponsive you may need to reverse the plugs.
1983	+	//
1984	+
1985	+	//
1986	+	// RepRapDiscount FULL GRAPHIC Smart Controller
1987	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/RepRapDiscount_Full_Graphic_Smart_Controller
1988	+	//
1989	+	//#define REPRAP_DISCOUNT_FULL_GRAPHIC_SMART_CONTROLLER
1990	+
1991	+	//
1992	+	// ReprapWorld Graphical LCD
1993	+	// https://reprapworld.com/?products_details&products_id/1218
1994	+	//
1995	+	//#define REPRAPWORLD_GRAPHICAL_LCD
1996	+
1997	+	//
1998	+	// Activate one of these if you have a Panucatt Devices
1999	+	// Viki 2.0 or mini Viki with Graphic LCD
2000	+	// https://www.panucatt.com
2001	+	//
2002	+	//#define VIKI2
2003	+	//#define miniVIKI
2004	+
2005	+	//
2006	+	// MakerLab Mini Panel with graphic
2007	+	// controller and SD support - https://reprap.org/wiki/Mini_panel
2008	+	//
2009	+	//#define MINIPANEL
2010	+
2011	+	//
2012	+	// MaKr3d Makr-Panel with graphic controller and SD support.
2013	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/MaKr3d_MaKrPanel
2014	+	//
2015	+	//#define MAKRPANEL
2016	+
2017	+	//
2018	+	// Adafruit ST7565 Full Graphic Controller.
2019	+	// https://github.com/eboston/Adafruit-ST7565-Full-Graphic-Controller/
2020	+	//
2021	+	//#define ELB_FULL_GRAPHIC_CONTROLLER
2022	+
2023	+	//
2024	+	// BQ LCD Smart Controller shipped by
2025	+	// default with the BQ Hephestos 2 and Witbox 2.
2026	+	//
2027	+	//#define BQ_LCD_SMART_CONTROLLER
2028	+
2029	+	//
2030	+	// Cartesio UI
2031	+	// http://mauk.cc/webshop/cartesio-shop/electronics/user-interface
2032	+	//
2033	+	//#define CARTESIO_UI
2034	+
2035	+	//
2036	+	// LCD for Melzi Card with Graphical LCD
2037	+	//
2038	+	//#define LCD_FOR_MELZI
2039	+
2040	+	//
2041	+	// Original Ulticontroller from Ultimaker 2 printer with SSD1309 I2C display and encoder
2042	+	// https://github.com/Ultimaker/Ultimaker2/tree/master/1249_Ulticontroller_Board_(x1)
2043	+	//
2044	+	//#define ULTI_CONTROLLER
2045	+
2046	+	//
2047	+	// MKS MINI12864 with graphic controller and SD support
2048	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/MKS_MINI_12864
2049	+	//
2050	+	//#define MKS_MINI_12864
2051	+
2052	+	//
2053	+	// MKS LCD12864A/B with graphic controller and SD support. Follows MKS_MINI_12864 pinout.
2054	+	// https://www.aliexpress.com/item/33018110072.html
2055	+	//
2056	+	//#define MKS_LCD12864
2057	+
2058	+	//
2059	+	// FYSETC variant of the MINI12864 graphic controller with SD support
2060	+	// https://wiki.fysetc.com/Mini12864_Panel/
2061	+	//
2062	+	//#define FYSETC_MINI_12864_X_X // Type C/D/E/F. No tunable RGB Backlight by default
2063	+	//#define FYSETC_MINI_12864_1_2 // Type C/D/E/F. Simple RGB Backlight (always on)
2064	+	//#define FYSETC_MINI_12864_2_0 // Type A/B. Discreet RGB Backlight
2065	+	//#define FYSETC_MINI_12864_2_1 // Type A/B. NeoPixel RGB Backlight
2066	+	//#define FYSETC_GENERIC_12864_1_1 // Larger display with basic ON/OFF backlight.
2067	+
2068	+	//
2069	+	// Factory display for Creality CR-10
2070	+	// https://www.aliexpress.com/item/32833148327.html
2071	+	//
2072	+	// This is RAMPS-compatible using a single 10-pin connector.
2073	+	// (For CR-10 owners who want to replace the Melzi Creality board but retain the display)
2074	+	//
2075	+	#define CR10_STOCKDISPLAY
2076	+
2077	+	//
2078	+	// Ender-2 OEM display, a variant of the MKS_MINI_12864
2079	+	//
2080	+	//#define ENDER2_STOCKDISPLAY
2081	+
2082	+	//
2083	+	// ANET and Tronxy Graphical Controller
2084	+	//
2085	+	// Anet 128x64 full graphics lcd with rotary encoder as used on Anet A6
2086	+	// A clone of the RepRapDiscount full graphics display but with
2087	+	// different pins/wiring (see pins_ANET_10.h).
2088	+	//
2089	+	//#define ANET_FULL_GRAPHICS_LCD
2090	+
2091	+	//
2092	+	// AZSMZ 12864 LCD with SD
2093	+	// https://www.aliexpress.com/item/32837222770.html
2094	+	//
2095	+	//#define AZSMZ_12864
2096	+
2097	+	//
2098	+	// Silvergate GLCD controller
2099	+	// https://github.com/android444/Silvergate
2100	+	//
2101	+	//#define SILVER_GATE_GLCD_CONTROLLER
2102	+
2103	+	//=============================================================================
2104	+	//============================== OLED Displays ==============================
2105	+	//=============================================================================
2106	+
2107	+	//
2108	+	// SSD1306 OLED full graphics generic display
2109	+	//
2110	+	//#define U8GLIB_SSD1306
2111	+
2112	+	//
2113	+	// SAV OLEd LCD module support using either SSD1306 or SH1106 based LCD modules
2114	+	//
2115	+	//#define SAV_3DGLCD
2116	+	#if ENABLED(SAV_3DGLCD)
2117	+	#define U8GLIB_SSD1306
2118	+	//#define U8GLIB_SH1106
2119	+	#endif
2120	+
2121	+	//
2122	+	// TinyBoy2 128x64 OLED / Encoder Panel
2123	+	//
2124	+	//#define OLED_PANEL_TINYBOY2
2125	+
2126	+	//
2127	+	// MKS OLED 1.3" 128×64 FULL GRAPHICS CONTROLLER
2128	+	// https://reprap.org/wiki/MKS_12864OLED
2129	+	//
2130	+	// Tiny, but very sharp OLED display
2131	+	//
2132	+	//#define MKS_12864OLED // Uses the SH1106 controller (default)
2133	+	//#define MKS_12864OLED_SSD1306 // Uses the SSD1306 controller
2134	+
2135	+	//
2136	+	// Zonestar OLED 128×64 FULL GRAPHICS CONTROLLER
2137	+	//
2138	+	//#define ZONESTAR_12864LCD // Graphical (DOGM) with ST7920 controller
2139	+	//#define ZONESTAR_12864OLED // 1.3" OLED with SH1106 controller (default)
2140	+	//#define ZONESTAR_12864OLED_SSD1306 // 0.96" OLED with SSD1306 controller
2141	+
2142	+	//
2143	+	// Einstart S OLED SSD1306
2144	+	//
2145	+	//#define U8GLIB_SH1106_EINSTART
2146	+
2147	+	//
2148	+	// Overlord OLED display/controller with i2c buzzer and LEDs
2149	+	//
2150	+	//#define OVERLORD_OLED
2151	+
2152	+	//
2153	+	// FYSETC OLED 2.42" 128×64 FULL GRAPHICS CONTROLLER with WS2812 RGB
2154	+	// Where to find : https://www.aliexpress.com/item/4000345255731.html
2155	+	//#define FYSETC_242_OLED_12864 // Uses the SSD1309 controller
2156	+
2157	+	//=============================================================================
2158	+	//========================== Extensible UI Displays ===========================
2159	+	//=============================================================================
2160	+
2161	+	//
2162	+	// DGUS Touch Display with DWIN OS. (Choose one.)
2163	+	// ORIGIN : https://www.aliexpress.com/item/32993409517.html
2164	+	// FYSETC : https://www.aliexpress.com/item/32961471929.html
2165	+	//
2166	+	//#define DGUS_LCD_UI_ORIGIN
2167	+	//#define DGUS_LCD_UI_FYSETC
2168	+	//#define DGUS_LCD_UI_HIPRECY
2169	+
2170	+	//
2171	+	// Touch-screen LCD for Malyan M200/M300 printers
2172	+	//
2173	+	//#define MALYAN_LCD
2174	+	#if ENABLED(MALYAN_LCD)
2175	+	#define LCD_SERIAL_PORT 1 // Default is 1 for Malyan M200
2176	+	#endif
2177	+
2178	+	//
2179	+	// Touch UI for FTDI EVE (FT800/FT810) displays
2180	+	// See Configuration_adv.h for all configuration options.
2181	+	//
2182	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_FTDI_EVE
2183	+
2184	+	//
2185	+	// Touch-screen LCD for Anycubic printers
2186	+	//
2187	+	//#define ANYCUBIC_LCD_I3MEGA
2188	+	//#define ANYCUBIC_LCD_CHIRON
2189	+	#if EITHER(ANYCUBIC_LCD_I3MEGA, ANYCUBIC_LCD_CHIRON)
2190	+	#define LCD_SERIAL_PORT 3 // Default is 3 for Anycubic
2191	+	//#define ANYCUBIC_LCD_DEBUG
2192	+	#endif
2193	+
2194	+	//
2195	+	// Third-party or vendor-customized controller interfaces.
2196	+	// Sources should be installed in 'src/lcd/extensible_ui'.
2197	+	//
2198	+	//#define EXTENSIBLE_UI
2199	+
2200	+	#if ENABLED(EXTENSIBLE_UI)
2201	+	//#define EXTUI_LOCAL_BEEPER // Enables use of local Beeper pin with external display
2202	+	#endif
2203	+
2204	+	//=============================================================================
2205	+	//=============================== Graphical TFTs ==============================
2206	+	//=============================================================================
2207	+
2208	+	/**
2209	+	* TFT Type - Select your Display type
2210	+	*
2211	+	* Available options are:
2212	+	* MKS_TS35_V2_0,
2213	+	* MKS_ROBIN_TFT24, MKS_ROBIN_TFT28, MKS_ROBIN_TFT32, MKS_ROBIN_TFT35,
2214	+	* MKS_ROBIN_TFT43, MKS_ROBIN_TFT_V1_1R
2215	+	* TFT_TRONXY_X5SA, ANYCUBIC_TFT35, LONGER_LK_TFT28
2216	+	* TFT_GENERIC
2217	+	*
2218	+	* For TFT_GENERIC, you need to configure these 3 options:
2219	+	* Driver: TFT_DRIVER
2220	+	* Current Drivers are: AUTO, ST7735, ST7789, ST7796, R61505, ILI9328, ILI9341, ILI9488
2221	+	* Resolution: TFT_WIDTH and TFT_HEIGHT
2222	+	* Interface: TFT_INTERFACE_FSMC or TFT_INTERFACE_SPI
2223	+	*/
2224	+	//#define TFT_GENERIC
2225	+
2226	+	/**
2227	+	* TFT UI - User Interface Selection. Enable one of the following options:
2228	+	*
2229	+	* TFT_CLASSIC_UI - Emulated DOGM - 128x64 Upscaled
2230	+	* TFT_COLOR_UI - Marlin Default Menus, Touch Friendly, using full TFT capabilities
2231	+	* TFT_LVGL_UI - A Modern UI using LVGL
2232	+	*
2233	+	* For LVGL_UI also copy the 'assets' folder from the build directory to the
2234	+	* root of your SD card, together with the compiled firmware.
2235	+	*/
2236	+	//#define TFT_CLASSIC_UI
2237	+	//#define TFT_COLOR_UI
2238	+	//#define TFT_LVGL_UI
2239	+
2240	+	/**
2241	+	* TFT Rotation. Set to one of the following values:
2242	+	*
2243	+	* TFT_ROTATE_90, TFT_ROTATE_90_MIRROR_X, TFT_ROTATE_90_MIRROR_Y,
2244	+	* TFT_ROTATE_180, TFT_ROTATE_180_MIRROR_X, TFT_ROTATE_180_MIRROR_Y,
2245	+	* TFT_ROTATE_270, TFT_ROTATE_270_MIRROR_X, TFT_ROTATE_270_MIRROR_Y,
2246	+	* TFT_MIRROR_X, TFT_MIRROR_Y, TFT_NO_ROTATION
2247	+	*/
2248	+	//#define TFT_ROTATION TFT_NO_ROTATION
2249	+
2250	+	//=============================================================================
2251	+	//============================ Other Controllers ============================
2252	+	//=============================================================================
2253	+
2254	+	//
2255	+	// Ender-3 v2 OEM display. A DWIN display with Rotary Encoder.
2256	+	//
2257	+	//#define DWIN_CREALITY_LCD
2258	+
2259	+	//
2260	+	// ADS7843/XPT2046 ADC Touchscreen such as ILI9341 2.8
2261	+	//
2262	+	//#define TOUCH_SCREEN
2263	+	#if ENABLED(TOUCH_SCREEN)
2264	+	#define BUTTON_DELAY_EDIT 50 // (ms) Button repeat delay for edit screens
2265	+	#define BUTTON_DELAY_MENU 250 // (ms) Button repeat delay for menus
2266	+
2267	+	#define TOUCH_SCREEN_CALIBRATION
2268	+
2269	+	//#define XPT2046_X_CALIBRATION 12316
2270	+	//#define XPT2046_Y_CALIBRATION -8981
2271	+	//#define XPT2046_X_OFFSET -43
2272	+	//#define XPT2046_Y_OFFSET 257
2273	+	#endif
2274	+
2275	+	//
2276	+	// RepRapWorld REPRAPWORLD_KEYPAD v1.1
2277	+	// https://reprapworld.com/products/electronics/ramps/keypad_v1_0_fully_assembled/
2278	+	//
2279	+	//#define REPRAPWORLD_KEYPAD
2280	+	//#define REPRAPWORLD_KEYPAD_MOVE_STEP 10.0 // (mm) Distance to move per key-press
2281	+
2282	+	//=============================================================================
2283	+	//=============================== Extra Features ==============================
2284	+	//=============================================================================
2285	+
2286	+	// @section extras
2287	+
2288	+	// Set number of user-controlled fans. Disable to use all board-defined fans.
2289	+	// :[1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8]
2290	+	//#define NUM_M106_FANS 1
2291	+
2292	+	// Increase the FAN PWM frequency. Removes the PWM noise but increases heating in the FET/Arduino
2293	+	//#define FAST_PWM_FAN
2294	+
2295	+	// Use software PWM to drive the fan, as for the heaters. This uses a very low frequency
2296	+	// which is not as annoying as with the hardware PWM. On the other hand, if this frequency
2297	+	// is too low, you should also increment SOFT_PWM_SCALE.
2298	+	//#define FAN_SOFT_PWM
2299	+
2300	+	// Incrementing this by 1 will double the software PWM frequency,
2301	+	// affecting heaters, and the fan if FAN_SOFT_PWM is enabled.
2302	+	// However, control resolution will be halved for each increment;
2303	+	// at zero value, there are 128 effective control positions.
2304	+	// :[0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7]
2305	+	#define SOFT_PWM_SCALE 0
2306	+
2307	+	// If SOFT_PWM_SCALE is set to a value higher than 0, dithering can
2308	+	// be used to mitigate the associated resolution loss. If enabled,
2309	+	// some of the PWM cycles are stretched so on average the desired
2310	+	// duty cycle is attained.
2311	+	//#define SOFT_PWM_DITHER
2312	+
2313	+	// Temperature status LEDs that display the hotend and bed temperature.
2314	+	// If all hotends, bed temperature, and target temperature are under 54C
2315	+	// then the BLUE led is on. Otherwise the RED led is on. (1C hysteresis)
2316	+	//#define TEMP_STAT_LEDS
2317	+
2318	+	// Support for the BariCUDA Paste Extruder
2319	+	//#define BARICUDA
2320	+
2321	+	// Support for BlinkM/CyzRgb
2322	+	//#define BLINKM
2323	+
2324	+	// Support for PCA9632 PWM LED driver
2325	+	//#define PCA9632
2326	+
2327	+	// Support for PCA9533 PWM LED driver
2328	+	//#define PCA9533
2329	+
2330	+	/**
2331	+	* RGB LED / LED Strip Control
2332	+	*
2333	+	* Enable support for an RGB LED connected to 5V digital pins, or
2334	+	* an RGB Strip connected to MOSFETs controlled by digital pins.
2335	+	*
2336	+	* Adds the M150 command to set the LED (or LED strip) color.
2337	+	* If pins are PWM capable (e.g., 4, 5, 6, 11) then a range of
2338	+	* luminance values can be set from 0 to 255.
2339	+	* For NeoPixel LED an overall brightness parameter is also available.
2340	+	*
2341	+	* * CAUTION *
2342	+	* LED Strips require a MOSFET Chip between PWM lines and LEDs,
2343	+	* as the Arduino cannot handle the current the LEDs will require.
2344	+	* Failure to follow this precaution can destroy your Arduino!
2345	+	* NOTE: A separate 5V power supply is required! The NeoPixel LED needs
2346	+	* more current than the Arduino 5V linear regulator can produce.
2347	+	* * CAUTION *
2348	+	*
2349	+	* LED Type. Enable only one of the following two options.
2350	+	*/
2351	+	//#define RGB_LED
2352	+	//#define RGBW_LED
2353	+
2354	+	#if EITHER(RGB_LED, RGBW_LED)
2355	+	//#define RGB_LED_R_PIN 34
2356	+	//#define RGB_LED_G_PIN 43
2357	+	//#define RGB_LED_B_PIN 35
2358	+	//#define RGB_LED_W_PIN -1
2359	+	#endif
2360	+
2361	+	// Support for Adafruit NeoPixel LED driver
2362	+	//#define NEOPIXEL_LED
2363	+	#if ENABLED(NEOPIXEL_LED)
2364	+	#define NEOPIXEL_TYPE NEO_GRBW // NEO_GRBW / NEO_GRB - four/three channel driver type (defined in Adafruit_NeoPixel.h)
2365	+	#define NEOPIXEL_PIN 4 // LED driving pin
2366	+	//#define NEOPIXEL2_TYPE NEOPIXEL_TYPE
2367	+	//#define NEOPIXEL2_PIN 5
2368	+	#define NEOPIXEL_PIXELS 30 // Number of LEDs in the strip. (Longest strip when NEOPIXEL2_SEPARATE is disabled.)
2369	+	#define NEOPIXEL_IS_SEQUENTIAL // Sequential display for temperature change - LED by LED. Disable to change all LEDs at once.
2370	+	#define NEOPIXEL_BRIGHTNESS 127 // Initial brightness (0-255)
2371	+	//#define NEOPIXEL_STARTUP_TEST // Cycle through colors at startup
2372	+
2373	+	// Support for second Adafruit NeoPixel LED driver controlled with M150 S1 ...
2374	+	//#define NEOPIXEL2_SEPARATE
2375	+	#if ENABLED(NEOPIXEL2_SEPARATE)
2376	+	#define NEOPIXEL2_PIXELS 15 // Number of LEDs in the second strip
2377	+	#define NEOPIXEL2_BRIGHTNESS 127 // Initial brightness (0-255)
2378	+	#define NEOPIXEL2_STARTUP_TEST // Cycle through colors at startup
2379	+	#else
2380	+	//#define NEOPIXEL2_INSERIES // Default behavior is NeoPixel 2 in parallel
2381	+	#endif
2382	+
2383	+	// Use a single NeoPixel LED for static (background) lighting
2384	+	//#define NEOPIXEL_BKGD_LED_INDEX 0 // Index of the LED to use
2385	+	//#define NEOPIXEL_BKGD_COLOR { 255, 255, 255, 0 } // R, G, B, W
2386	+	#endif
2387	+
2388	+	/**
2389	+	* Printer Event LEDs
2390	+	*
2391	+	* During printing, the LEDs will reflect the printer status:
2392	+	*
2393	+	* - Gradually change from blue to violet as the heated bed gets to target temp
2394	+	* - Gradually change from violet to red as the hotend gets to temperature
2395	+	* - Change to white to illuminate work surface
2396	+	* - Change to green once print has finished
2397	+	* - Turn off after the print has finished and the user has pushed a button
2398	+	*/
2399	+	#if ANY(BLINKM, RGB_LED, RGBW_LED, PCA9632, PCA9533, NEOPIXEL_LED)
2400	+	#define PRINTER_EVENT_LEDS
2401	+	#endif
2402	+
2403	+	/**
2404	+	* Number of servos
2405	+	*
2406	+	* For some servo-related options NUM_SERVOS will be set automatically.
2407	+	* Set this manually if there are extra servos needing manual control.
2408	+	* Set to 0 to turn off servo support.
2409	+	*/
2410	+	//#define NUM_SERVOS 3 // Servo index starts with 0 for M280 command
2411	+
2412	+	// (ms) Delay before the next move will start, to give the servo time to reach its target angle.
2413	+	// 300ms is a good value but you can try less delay.
2414	+	// If the servo can't reach the requested position, increase it.
2415	+	#define SERVO_DELAY { 300 }
2416	+
2417	+	// Only power servos during movement, otherwise leave off to prevent jitter
2418	+	//#define DEACTIVATE_SERVOS_AFTER_MOVE
2419	+
2420	+	// Edit servo angles with M281 and save to EEPROM with M500
2421	+	//#define EDITABLE_SERVO_ANGLES

Configuration_adv.h(file created)

		@@ -0,0 +1,3589 @@
1	+	/**
2	+	* Marlin 3D Printer Firmware
3	+	* Copyright (c) 2020 MarlinFirmware [https://github.com/MarlinFirmware/Marlin]
4	+	*
5	+	* Based on Sprinter and grbl.
6	+	* Copyright (c) 2011 Camiel Gubbels / Erik van der Zalm
7	+	*
8	+	* This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
9	+	* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
10	+	* the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
11	+	* (at your option) any later version.
12	+	*
13	+	* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
14	+	* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
15	+	* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
16	+	* GNU General Public License for more details.
17	+	*
18	+	* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19	+	* along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
20	+	*
21	+	*/
22	+	#pragma once
23	+
24	+	/**
25	+	* Configuration_adv.h
26	+	*
27	+	* Advanced settings.
28	+	* Only change these if you know exactly what you're doing.
29	+	* Some of these settings can damage your printer if improperly set!
30	+	*
31	+	* Basic settings can be found in Configuration.h
32	+	*/
33	+	#define CONFIGURATION_ADV_H_VERSION 020007
34	+
35	+	//===========================================================================
36	+	//============================= Thermal Settings ============================
37	+	//===========================================================================
38	+	// @section temperature
39	+
40	+	/**
41	+	* Thermocouple sensors are quite sensitive to noise. Any noise induced in
42	+	* the sensor wires, such as by stepper motor wires run in parallel to them,
43	+	* may result in the thermocouple sensor reporting spurious errors. This
44	+	* value is the number of errors which can occur in a row before the error
45	+	* is reported. This allows us to ignore intermittent error conditions while
46	+	* still detecting an actual failure, which should result in a continuous
47	+	* stream of errors from the sensor.
48	+	*
49	+	* Set this value to 0 to fail on the first error to occur.
50	+	*/
51	+	#define THERMOCOUPLE_MAX_ERRORS 15
52	+
53	+	//
54	+	// Custom Thermistor 1000 parameters
55	+	//
56	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_0 == 1000
57	+	#define HOTEND0_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
58	+	#define HOTEND0_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
59	+	#define HOTEND0_BETA 3950 // Beta value
60	+	#endif
61	+
62	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_1 == 1000
63	+	#define HOTEND1_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
64	+	#define HOTEND1_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
65	+	#define HOTEND1_BETA 3950 // Beta value
66	+	#endif
67	+
68	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_2 == 1000
69	+	#define HOTEND2_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
70	+	#define HOTEND2_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
71	+	#define HOTEND2_BETA 3950 // Beta value
72	+	#endif
73	+
74	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_3 == 1000
75	+	#define HOTEND3_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
76	+	#define HOTEND3_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
77	+	#define HOTEND3_BETA 3950 // Beta value
78	+	#endif
79	+
80	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_4 == 1000
81	+	#define HOTEND4_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
82	+	#define HOTEND4_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
83	+	#define HOTEND4_BETA 3950 // Beta value
84	+	#endif
85	+
86	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_5 == 1000
87	+	#define HOTEND5_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
88	+	#define HOTEND5_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
89	+	#define HOTEND5_BETA 3950 // Beta value
90	+	#endif
91	+
92	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_6 == 1000
93	+	#define HOTEND6_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
94	+	#define HOTEND6_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
95	+	#define HOTEND6_BETA 3950 // Beta value
96	+	#endif
97	+
98	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_7 == 1000
99	+	#define HOTEND7_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
100	+	#define HOTEND7_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
101	+	#define HOTEND7_BETA 3950 // Beta value
102	+	#endif
103	+
104	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_BED == 1000
105	+	#define BED_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
106	+	#define BED_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
107	+	#define BED_BETA 3950 // Beta value
108	+	#endif
109	+
110	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_CHAMBER == 1000
111	+	#define CHAMBER_PULLUP_RESISTOR_OHMS 4700 // Pullup resistor
112	+	#define CHAMBER_RESISTANCE_25C_OHMS 100000 // Resistance at 25C
113	+	#define CHAMBER_BETA 3950 // Beta value
114	+	#endif
115	+
116	+	//
117	+	// Hephestos 2 24V heated bed upgrade kit.
118	+	// https://store.bq.com/en/heated-bed-kit-hephestos2
119	+	//
120	+	//#define HEPHESTOS2_HEATED_BED_KIT
121	+	#if ENABLED(HEPHESTOS2_HEATED_BED_KIT)
122	+	#undef TEMP_SENSOR_BED
123	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_BED 70
124	+	#define HEATER_BED_INVERTING true
125	+	#endif
126	+
127	+	//
128	+	// Heated Bed Bang-Bang options
129	+	//
130	+	#if DISABLED(PIDTEMPBED)
131	+	#define BED_CHECK_INTERVAL 5000 // (ms) Interval between checks in bang-bang control
132	+	#if ENABLED(BED_LIMIT_SWITCHING)
133	+	#define BED_HYSTERESIS 2 // (°C) Only set the relevant heater state when ABS(T-target) > BED_HYSTERESIS
134	+	#endif
135	+	#endif
136	+
137	+	//
138	+	// Heated Chamber options
139	+	//
140	+	#if TEMP_SENSOR_CHAMBER
141	+	#define CHAMBER_MINTEMP 5
142	+	#define CHAMBER_MAXTEMP 60
143	+	#define TEMP_CHAMBER_HYSTERESIS 1 // (°C) Temperature proximity considered "close enough" to the target
144	+	//#define CHAMBER_LIMIT_SWITCHING
145	+	//#define HEATER_CHAMBER_PIN 44 // Chamber heater on/off pin
146	+	//#define HEATER_CHAMBER_INVERTING false
147	+
148	+	//#define CHAMBER_FAN // Enable a fan on the chamber
149	+	#if ENABLED(CHAMBER_FAN)
150	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_MODE 2 // Fan control mode: 0=Static; 1=Linear increase when temp is higher than target; 2=V-shaped curve.
151	+	#if CHAMBER_FAN_MODE == 0
152	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_BASE 255 // Chamber fan PWM (0-255)
153	+	#elif CHAMBER_FAN_MODE == 1
154	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_BASE 128 // Base chamber fan PWM (0-255); turns on when chamber temperature is above the target
155	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_FACTOR 25 // PWM increase per °C above target
156	+	#elif CHAMBER_FAN_MODE == 2
157	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_BASE 128 // Minimum chamber fan PWM (0-255)
158	+	#define CHAMBER_FAN_FACTOR 25 // PWM increase per °C difference from target
159	+	#endif
160	+	#endif
161	+
162	+	//#define CHAMBER_VENT // Enable a servo-controlled vent on the chamber
163	+	#if ENABLED(CHAMBER_VENT)
164	+	#define CHAMBER_VENT_SERVO_NR 1 // Index of the vent servo
165	+	#define HIGH_EXCESS_HEAT_LIMIT 5 // How much above target temp to consider there is excess heat in the chamber
166	+	#define LOW_EXCESS_HEAT_LIMIT 3
167	+	#define MIN_COOLING_SLOPE_TIME_CHAMBER_VENT 20
168	+	#define MIN_COOLING_SLOPE_DEG_CHAMBER_VENT 1.5
169	+	#endif
170	+	#endif
171	+
172	+	/**
173	+	* Thermal Protection provides additional protection to your printer from damage
174	+	* and fire. Marlin always includes safe min and max temperature ranges which
175	+	* protect against a broken or disconnected thermistor wire.
176	+	*
177	+	* The issue: If a thermistor falls out, it will report the much lower
178	+	* temperature of the air in the room, and the the firmware will keep
179	+	* the heater on.
180	+	*
181	+	* The solution: Once the temperature reaches the target, start observing.
182	+	* If the temperature stays too far below the target (hysteresis) for too
183	+	* long (period), the firmware will halt the machine as a safety precaution.
184	+	*
185	+	* If you get false positives for "Thermal Runaway", increase
186	+	* THERMAL_PROTECTION_HYSTERESIS and/or THERMAL_PROTECTION_PERIOD
187	+	*/
188	+	#if ENABLED(THERMAL_PROTECTION_HOTENDS)
189	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_PERIOD 40 // Seconds
190	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_HYSTERESIS 4 // Degrees Celsius
191	+
192	+	//#define ADAPTIVE_FAN_SLOWING // Slow part cooling fan if temperature drops
193	+	#if BOTH(ADAPTIVE_FAN_SLOWING, PIDTEMP)
194	+	//#define NO_FAN_SLOWING_IN_PID_TUNING // Don't slow fan speed during M303
195	+	#endif
196	+
197	+	/**
198	+	* Whenever an M104, M109, or M303 increases the target temperature, the
199	+	* firmware will wait for the WATCH_TEMP_PERIOD to expire. If the temperature
200	+	* hasn't increased by WATCH_TEMP_INCREASE degrees, the machine is halted and
201	+	* requires a hard reset. This test restarts with any M104/M109/M303, but only
202	+	* if the current temperature is far enough below the target for a reliable
203	+	* test.
204	+	*
205	+	* If you get false positives for "Heating failed", increase WATCH_TEMP_PERIOD
206	+	* and/or decrease WATCH_TEMP_INCREASE. WATCH_TEMP_INCREASE should not be set
207	+	* below 2.
208	+	*/
209	+	#define WATCH_TEMP_PERIOD 20 // Seconds
210	+	#define WATCH_TEMP_INCREASE 2 // Degrees Celsius
211	+	#endif
212	+
213	+	/**
214	+	* Thermal Protection parameters for the bed are just as above for hotends.
215	+	*/
216	+	#if ENABLED(THERMAL_PROTECTION_BED)
217	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_BED_PERIOD 20 // Seconds
218	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_BED_HYSTERESIS 2 // Degrees Celsius
219	+
220	+	/**
221	+	* As described above, except for the bed (M140/M190/M303).
222	+	*/
223	+	#define WATCH_BED_TEMP_PERIOD 60 // Seconds
224	+	#define WATCH_BED_TEMP_INCREASE 2 // Degrees Celsius
225	+	#endif
226	+
227	+	/**
228	+	* Thermal Protection parameters for the heated chamber.
229	+	*/
230	+	#if ENABLED(THERMAL_PROTECTION_CHAMBER)
231	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_CHAMBER_PERIOD 20 // Seconds
232	+	#define THERMAL_PROTECTION_CHAMBER_HYSTERESIS 2 // Degrees Celsius
233	+
234	+	/**
235	+	* Heated chamber watch settings (M141/M191).
236	+	*/
237	+	#define WATCH_CHAMBER_TEMP_PERIOD 60 // Seconds
238	+	#define WATCH_CHAMBER_TEMP_INCREASE 2 // Degrees Celsius
239	+	#endif
240	+
241	+	#if ENABLED(PIDTEMP)
242	+	// Add an experimental additional term to the heater power, proportional to the extrusion speed.
243	+	// A well-chosen Kc value should add just enough power to melt the increased material volume.
244	+	//#define PID_EXTRUSION_SCALING
245	+	#if ENABLED(PID_EXTRUSION_SCALING)
246	+	#define DEFAULT_Kc (100) // heating power = Kc * e_speed
247	+	#define LPQ_MAX_LEN 50
248	+	#endif
249	+
250	+	/**
251	+	* Add an experimental additional term to the heater power, proportional to the fan speed.
252	+	* A well-chosen Kf value should add just enough power to compensate for power-loss from the cooling fan.
253	+	* You can either just add a constant compensation with the DEFAULT_Kf value
254	+	* or follow the instruction below to get speed-dependent compensation.
255	+	*
256	+	* Constant compensation (use only with fanspeeds of 0% and 100%)
257	+	* ---------------------------------------------------------------------
258	+	* A good starting point for the Kf-value comes from the calculation:
259	+	* kf = (power_fan * eff_fan) / power_heater * 255
260	+	* where eff_fan is between 0.0 and 1.0, based on fan-efficiency and airflow to the nozzle / heater.
261	+	*
262	+	* Example:
263	+	* Heater: 40W, Fan: 0.1A * 24V = 2.4W, eff_fan = 0.8
264	+	* Kf = (2.4W * 0.8) / 40W * 255 = 12.24
265	+	*
266	+	* Fan-speed dependent compensation
267	+	* --------------------------------
268	+	* 1. To find a good Kf value, set the hotend temperature, wait for it to settle, and enable the fan (100%).
269	+	* Make sure PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR is 0 and PID_FAN_SCALING_ALTERNATIVE_DEFINITION is not enabled.
270	+	* If you see the temperature drop repeat the test, increasing the Kf value slowly, until the temperature
271	+	* drop goes away. If the temperature overshoots after enabling the fan, the Kf value is too big.
272	+	* 2. Note the Kf-value for fan-speed at 100%
273	+	* 3. Determine a good value for PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED, which is around the speed, where the fan starts moving.
274	+	* 4. Repeat step 1. and 2. for this fan speed.
275	+	* 5. Enable PID_FAN_SCALING_ALTERNATIVE_DEFINITION and enter the two identified Kf-values in
276	+	* PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_FULL_SPEED and PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_MIN_SPEED. Enter the minimum speed in PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED
277	+	*/
278	+	//#define PID_FAN_SCALING
279	+	#if ENABLED(PID_FAN_SCALING)
280	+	//#define PID_FAN_SCALING_ALTERNATIVE_DEFINITION
281	+	#if ENABLED(PID_FAN_SCALING_ALTERNATIVE_DEFINITION)
282	+	// The alternative definition is used for an easier configuration.
283	+	// Just figure out Kf at fullspeed (255) and PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED.
284	+	// DEFAULT_Kf and PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR are calculated accordingly.
285	+
286	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_FULL_SPEED 13.0 //=PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR*255+DEFAULT_Kf
287	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_MIN_SPEED 6.0 //=PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR*PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED+DEFAULT_Kf
288	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED 10.0 // Minimum fan speed at which to enable PID_FAN_SCALING
289	+
290	+	#define DEFAULT_Kf (255.0PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_MIN_SPEED-PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_FULL_SPEEDPID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED)/(255.0-PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED)
291	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR (PID_FAN_SCALING_AT_FULL_SPEED-DEFAULT_Kf)/255.0
292	+
293	+	#else
294	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_LIN_FACTOR (0) // Power loss due to cooling = Kf * (fan_speed)
295	+	#define DEFAULT_Kf 10 // A constant value added to the PID-tuner
296	+	#define PID_FAN_SCALING_MIN_SPEED 10 // Minimum fan speed at which to enable PID_FAN_SCALING
297	+	#endif
298	+	#endif
299	+	#endif
300	+
301	+	/**
302	+	* Automatic Temperature Mode
303	+	*
304	+	* Dynamically adjust the hotend target temperature based on planned E moves.
305	+	*
306	+	* (Contrast with PID_EXTRUSION_SCALING, which tracks E movement and adjusts PID
307	+	* behavior using an additional kC value.)
308	+	*
309	+	* Autotemp is calculated by (mintemp + factor * mm_per_sec), capped to maxtemp.
310	+	*
311	+	* Enable Autotemp Mode with M104/M109 F<factor> S<mintemp> B<maxtemp>.
312	+	* Disable by sending M104/M109 with no F parameter (or F0 with AUTOTEMP_PROPORTIONAL).
313	+	*/
314	+	#define AUTOTEMP
315	+	#if ENABLED(AUTOTEMP)
316	+	#define AUTOTEMP_OLDWEIGHT 0.98
317	+	// Turn on AUTOTEMP on M104/M109 by default using proportions set here
318	+	//#define AUTOTEMP_PROPORTIONAL
319	+	#if ENABLED(AUTOTEMP_PROPORTIONAL)
320	+	#define AUTOTEMP_MIN_P 0 // (°C) Added to the target temperature
321	+	#define AUTOTEMP_MAX_P 5 // (°C) Added to the target temperature
322	+	#define AUTOTEMP_FACTOR_P 1 // Apply this F parameter by default (overridden by M104/M109 F)
323	+	#endif
324	+	#endif
325	+
326	+	// Show Temperature ADC value
327	+	// Enable for M105 to include ADC values read from temperature sensors.
328	+	//#define SHOW_TEMP_ADC_VALUES
329	+
330	+	/**
331	+	* High Temperature Thermistor Support
332	+	*
333	+	* Thermistors able to support high temperature tend to have a hard time getting
334	+	* good readings at room and lower temperatures. This means HEATER_X_RAW_LO_TEMP
335	+	* will probably be caught when the heating element first turns on during the
336	+	* preheating process, which will trigger a min_temp_error as a safety measure
337	+	* and force stop everything.
338	+	* To circumvent this limitation, we allow for a preheat time (during which,
339	+	* min_temp_error won't be triggered) and add a min_temp buffer to handle
340	+	* aberrant readings.
341	+	*
342	+	* If you want to enable this feature for your hotend thermistor(s)
343	+	* uncomment and set values > 0 in the constants below
344	+	*/
345	+
346	+	// The number of consecutive low temperature errors that can occur
347	+	// before a min_temp_error is triggered. (Shouldn't be more than 10.)
348	+	//#define MAX_CONSECUTIVE_LOW_TEMPERATURE_ERROR_ALLOWED 0
349	+
350	+	// The number of milliseconds a hotend will preheat before starting to check
351	+	// the temperature. This value should NOT be set to the time it takes the
352	+	// hot end to reach the target temperature, but the time it takes to reach
353	+	// the minimum temperature your thermistor can read. The lower the better/safer.
354	+	// This shouldn't need to be more than 30 seconds (30000)
355	+	//#define MILLISECONDS_PREHEAT_TIME 0
356	+
357	+	// @section extruder
358	+
359	+	// Extruder runout prevention.
360	+	// If the machine is idle and the temperature over MINTEMP
361	+	// then extrude some filament every couple of SECONDS.
362	+	//#define EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_PREVENT
363	+	#if ENABLED(EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_PREVENT)
364	+	#define EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_MINTEMP 190
365	+	#define EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_SECONDS 30
366	+	#define EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_SPEED 1500 // (mm/min)
367	+	#define EXTRUDER_RUNOUT_EXTRUDE 5 // (mm)
368	+	#endif
369	+
370	+	/**
371	+	* Hotend Idle Timeout
372	+	* Prevent filament in the nozzle from charring and causing a critical jam.
373	+	*/
374	+	//#define HOTEND_IDLE_TIMEOUT
375	+	#if ENABLED(HOTEND_IDLE_TIMEOUT)
376	+	#define HOTEND_IDLE_TIMEOUT_SEC (5*60) // (seconds) Time without extruder movement to trigger protection
377	+	#define HOTEND_IDLE_MIN_TRIGGER 180 // (°C) Minimum temperature to enable hotend protection
378	+	#define HOTEND_IDLE_NOZZLE_TARGET 0 // (°C) Safe temperature for the nozzle after timeout
379	+	#define HOTEND_IDLE_BED_TARGET 0 // (°C) Safe temperature for the bed after timeout
380	+	#endif
381	+
382	+	// @section temperature
383	+
384	+	// Calibration for AD595 / AD8495 sensor to adjust temperature measurements.
385	+	// The final temperature is calculated as (measuredTemp * GAIN) + OFFSET.
386	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_AD595_OFFSET 0.0
387	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_AD595_GAIN 1.0
388	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_AD8495_OFFSET 0.0
389	+	#define TEMP_SENSOR_AD8495_GAIN 1.0
390	+
391	+	/**
392	+	* Controller Fan
393	+	* To cool down the stepper drivers and MOSFETs.
394	+	*
395	+	* The fan turns on automatically whenever any driver is enabled and turns
396	+	* off (or reduces to idle speed) shortly after drivers are turned off.
397	+	*/
398	+	//#define USE_CONTROLLER_FAN
399	+	#if ENABLED(USE_CONTROLLER_FAN)
400	+	//#define CONTROLLER_FAN_PIN -1 // Set a custom pin for the controller fan
401	+	//#define CONTROLLER_FAN_USE_Z_ONLY // With this option only the Z axis is considered
402	+	//#define CONTROLLER_FAN_IGNORE_Z // Ignore Z stepper. Useful when stepper timeout is disabled.
403	+	#define CONTROLLERFAN_SPEED_MIN 0 // (0-255) Minimum speed. (If set below this value the fan is turned off.)
404	+	#define CONTROLLERFAN_SPEED_ACTIVE 255 // (0-255) Active speed, used when any motor is enabled
405	+	#define CONTROLLERFAN_SPEED_IDLE 0 // (0-255) Idle speed, used when motors are disabled
406	+	#define CONTROLLERFAN_IDLE_TIME 60 // (seconds) Extra time to keep the fan running after disabling motors
407	+	//#define CONTROLLER_FAN_EDITABLE // Enable M710 configurable settings
408	+	#if ENABLED(CONTROLLER_FAN_EDITABLE)
409	+	#define CONTROLLER_FAN_MENU // Enable the Controller Fan submenu
410	+	#endif
411	+	#endif
412	+
413	+	// When first starting the main fan, run it at full speed for the
414	+	// given number of milliseconds. This gets the fan spinning reliably
415	+	// before setting a PWM value. (Does not work with software PWM for fan on Sanguinololu)
416	+	//#define FAN_KICKSTART_TIME 100
417	+
418	+	// Some coolers may require a non-zero "off" state.
419	+	//#define FAN_OFF_PWM 1
420	+
421	+	/**
422	+	* PWM Fan Scaling
423	+	*
424	+	* Define the min/max speeds for PWM fans (as set with M106).
425	+	*
426	+	* With these options the M106 0-255 value range is scaled to a subset
427	+	* to ensure that the fan has enough power to spin, or to run lower
428	+	* current fans with higher current. (e.g., 5V/12V fans with 12V/24V)
429	+	* Value 0 always turns off the fan.
430	+	*
431	+	* Define one or both of these to override the default 0-255 range.
432	+	*/
433	+	//#define FAN_MIN_PWM 50
434	+	//#define FAN_MAX_PWM 128
435	+
436	+	/**
437	+	* FAST PWM FAN Settings
438	+	*
439	+	* Use to change the FAST FAN PWM frequency (if enabled in Configuration.h)
440	+	* Combinations of PWM Modes, prescale values and TOP resolutions are used internally to produce a
441	+	* frequency as close as possible to the desired frequency.
442	+	*
443	+	* FAST_PWM_FAN_FREQUENCY [undefined by default]
444	+	* Set this to your desired frequency.
445	+	* If left undefined this defaults to F = F_CPU/(22551)
446	+	* i.e., F = 31.4kHz on 16MHz microcontrollers or F = 39.2kHz on 20MHz microcontrollers.
447	+	* These defaults are the same as with the old FAST_PWM_FAN implementation - no migration is required
448	+	* NOTE: Setting very low frequencies (< 10 Hz) may result in unexpected timer behavior.
449	+	*
450	+	* USE_OCR2A_AS_TOP [undefined by default]
451	+	* Boards that use TIMER2 for PWM have limitations resulting in only a few possible frequencies on TIMER2:
452	+	* 16MHz MCUs: [62.5KHz, 31.4KHz (default), 7.8KHz, 3.92KHz, 1.95KHz, 977Hz, 488Hz, 244Hz, 60Hz, 122Hz, 30Hz]
453	+	* 20MHz MCUs: [78.1KHz, 39.2KHz (default), 9.77KHz, 4.9KHz, 2.44KHz, 1.22KHz, 610Hz, 305Hz, 153Hz, 76Hz, 38Hz]
454	+	* A greater range can be achieved by enabling USE_OCR2A_AS_TOP. But note that this option blocks the use of
455	+	* PWM on pin OC2A. Only use this option if you don't need PWM on 0C2A. (Check your schematic.)
456	+	* USE_OCR2A_AS_TOP sacrifices duty cycle control resolution to achieve this broader range of frequencies.
457	+	*/
458	+	#if ENABLED(FAST_PWM_FAN)
459	+	//#define FAST_PWM_FAN_FREQUENCY 31400
460	+	//#define USE_OCR2A_AS_TOP
461	+	#endif
462	+
463	+	// @section extruder
464	+
465	+	/**
466	+	* Extruder cooling fans
467	+	*
468	+	* Extruder auto fans automatically turn on when their extruders'
469	+	* temperatures go above EXTRUDER_AUTO_FAN_TEMPERATURE.
470	+	*
471	+	* Your board's pins file specifies the recommended pins. Override those here
472	+	* or set to -1 to disable completely.
473	+	*
474	+	* Multiple extruders can be assigned to the same pin in which case
475	+	* the fan will turn on when any selected extruder is above the threshold.
476	+	*/
477	+	#define E0_AUTO_FAN_PIN P2_04
478	+	#define E1_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
479	+	#define E2_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
480	+	#define E3_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
481	+	#define E4_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
482	+	#define E5_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
483	+	#define E6_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
484	+	#define E7_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
485	+	#define CHAMBER_AUTO_FAN_PIN -1
486	+
487	+	#define EXTRUDER_AUTO_FAN_TEMPERATURE 50
488	+	#define EXTRUDER_AUTO_FAN_SPEED 255 // 255 == full speed
489	+	#define CHAMBER_AUTO_FAN_TEMPERATURE 30
490	+	#define CHAMBER_AUTO_FAN_SPEED 255
491	+
492	+	/**
493	+	* Part-Cooling Fan Multiplexer
494	+	*
495	+	* This feature allows you to digitally multiplex the fan output.
496	+	* The multiplexer is automatically switched at tool-change.
497	+	* Set FANMUX[012]_PINs below for up to 2, 4, or 8 multiplexed fans.
498	+	*/
499	+	#define FANMUX0_PIN -1
500	+	#define FANMUX1_PIN -1
501	+	#define FANMUX2_PIN -1
502	+
503	+	/**
504	+	* M355 Case Light on-off / brightness
505	+	*/
506	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_ENABLE
507	+	#if ENABLED(CASE_LIGHT_ENABLE)
508	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_PIN 4 // Override the default pin if needed
509	+	#define INVERT_CASE_LIGHT false // Set true if Case Light is ON when pin is LOW
510	+	#define CASE_LIGHT_DEFAULT_ON true // Set default power-up state on
511	+	#define CASE_LIGHT_DEFAULT_BRIGHTNESS 105 // Set default power-up brightness (0-255, requires PWM pin)
512	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_MAX_PWM 128 // Limit pwm
513	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_MENU // Add Case Light options to the LCD menu
514	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_NO_BRIGHTNESS // Disable brightness control. Enable for non-PWM lighting.
515	+	//#define CASE_LIGHT_USE_NEOPIXEL // Use NeoPixel LED as case light, requires NEOPIXEL_LED.
516	+	#if ENABLED(CASE_LIGHT_USE_NEOPIXEL)
517	+	#define CASE_LIGHT_NEOPIXEL_COLOR { 255, 255, 255, 255 } // { Red, Green, Blue, White }
518	+	#endif
519	+	#endif
520	+
521	+	// @section homing
522	+
523	+	// If you want endstops to stay on (by default) even when not homing
524	+	// enable this option. Override at any time with M120, M121.
525	+	//#define ENDSTOPS_ALWAYS_ON_DEFAULT
526	+
527	+	// @section extras
528	+
529	+	//#define Z_LATE_ENABLE // Enable Z the last moment. Needed if your Z driver overheats.
530	+
531	+	// Employ an external closed loop controller. Override pins here if needed.
532	+	//#define EXTERNAL_CLOSED_LOOP_CONTROLLER
533	+	#if ENABLED(EXTERNAL_CLOSED_LOOP_CONTROLLER)
534	+	//#define CLOSED_LOOP_ENABLE_PIN -1
535	+	//#define CLOSED_LOOP_MOVE_COMPLETE_PIN -1
536	+	#endif
537	+
538	+	/**
539	+	* Dual Steppers / Dual Endstops
540	+	*
541	+	* This section will allow you to use extra E drivers to drive a second motor for X, Y, or Z axes.
542	+	*
543	+	* For example, set X_DUAL_STEPPER_DRIVERS setting to use a second motor. If the motors need to
544	+	* spin in opposite directions set INVERT_X2_VS_X_DIR. If the second motor needs its own endstop
545	+	* set X_DUAL_ENDSTOPS. This can adjust for "racking." Use X2_USE_ENDSTOP to set the endstop plug
546	+	* that should be used for the second endstop. Extra endstops will appear in the output of 'M119'.
547	+	*
548	+	* Use X_DUAL_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT to adjust for mechanical imperfection. After homing both motors
549	+	* this offset is applied to the X2 motor. To find the offset home the X axis, and measure the error
550	+	* in X2. Dual endstop offsets can be set at runtime with 'M666 X<offset> Y<offset> Z<offset>'.
551	+	*/
552	+
553	+	//#define X_DUAL_STEPPER_DRIVERS
554	+	#if ENABLED(X_DUAL_STEPPER_DRIVERS)
555	+	#define INVERT_X2_VS_X_DIR true // Set 'true' if X motors should rotate in opposite directions
556	+	//#define X_DUAL_ENDSTOPS
557	+	#if ENABLED(X_DUAL_ENDSTOPS)
558	+	#define X2_USE_ENDSTOP _XMAX_
559	+	#define X2_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT 0
560	+	#endif
561	+	#endif
562	+
563	+	//#define Y_DUAL_STEPPER_DRIVERS
564	+	#if ENABLED(Y_DUAL_STEPPER_DRIVERS)
565	+	#define INVERT_Y2_VS_Y_DIR true // Set 'true' if Y motors should rotate in opposite directions
566	+	//#define Y_DUAL_ENDSTOPS
567	+	#if ENABLED(Y_DUAL_ENDSTOPS)
568	+	#define Y2_USE_ENDSTOP _YMAX_
569	+	#define Y2_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT 0
570	+	#endif
571	+	#endif
572	+
573	+	//
574	+	// For Z set the number of stepper drivers
575	+	//
576	+	#define NUM_Z_STEPPER_DRIVERS 1 // (1-4) Z options change based on how many
577	+
578	+	#if NUM_Z_STEPPER_DRIVERS > 1
579	+	//#define Z_MULTI_ENDSTOPS
580	+	#if ENABLED(Z_MULTI_ENDSTOPS)
581	+	#define Z2_USE_ENDSTOP _XMAX_
582	+	#define Z2_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT 0
583	+	#if NUM_Z_STEPPER_DRIVERS >= 3
584	+	#define Z3_USE_ENDSTOP _YMAX_
585	+	#define Z3_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT 0
586	+	#endif
587	+	#if NUM_Z_STEPPER_DRIVERS >= 4
588	+	#define Z4_USE_ENDSTOP _ZMAX_
589	+	#define Z4_ENDSTOP_ADJUSTMENT 0
590	+	#endif
591	+	#endif
592	+	#endif
593	+
594	+	/**
595	+	* Dual X Carriage
596	+	*
597	+	* This setup has two X carriages that can move independently, each with its own hotend.
598	+	* The carriages can be used to print an object with two colors or materials, or in
599	+	* "duplication mode" it can print two identical or X-mirrored objects simultaneously.
600	+	* The inactive carriage is parked automatically to prevent oozing.
601	+	* X1 is the left carriage, X2 the right. They park and home at opposite ends of the X axis.
602	+	* By default the X2 stepper is assigned to the first unused E plug on the board.
603	+	*
604	+	* The following Dual X Carriage modes can be selected with M605 S<mode>:
605	+	*
606	+	* 0 : (FULL_CONTROL) The slicer has full control over both X-carriages and can achieve optimal travel
607	+	* results as long as it supports dual X-carriages. (M605 S0)
608	+	*
609	+	* 1 : (AUTO_PARK) The firmware automatically parks and unparks the X-carriages on tool-change so
610	+	* that additional slicer support is not required. (M605 S1)
611	+	*
612	+	* 2 : (DUPLICATION) The firmware moves the second X-carriage and extruder in synchronization with
613	+	* the first X-carriage and extruder, to print 2 copies of the same object at the same time.
614	+	* Set the constant X-offset and temperature differential with M605 S2 X[offs] R[deg] and
615	+	* follow with M605 S2 to initiate duplicated movement.
616	+	*
617	+	* 3 : (MIRRORED) Formbot/Vivedino-inspired mirrored mode in which the second extruder duplicates
618	+	* the movement of the first except the second extruder is reversed in the X axis.
619	+	* Set the initial X offset and temperature differential with M605 S2 X[offs] R[deg] and
620	+	* follow with M605 S3 to initiate mirrored movement.
621	+	*/
622	+	//#define DUAL_X_CARRIAGE
623	+	#if ENABLED(DUAL_X_CARRIAGE)
624	+	#define X1_MIN_POS X_MIN_POS // Set to X_MIN_POS
625	+	#define X1_MAX_POS X_BED_SIZE // Set a maximum so the first X-carriage can't hit the parked second X-carriage
626	+	#define X2_MIN_POS 80 // Set a minimum to ensure the second X-carriage can't hit the parked first X-carriage
627	+	#define X2_MAX_POS 353 // Set this to the distance between toolheads when both heads are homed
628	+	#define X2_HOME_DIR 1 // Set to 1. The second X-carriage always homes to the maximum endstop position
629	+	#define X2_HOME_POS X2_MAX_POS // Default X2 home position. Set to X2_MAX_POS.
630	+	// However: In this mode the HOTEND_OFFSET_X value for the second extruder provides a software
631	+	// override for X2_HOME_POS. This also allow recalibration of the distance between the two endstops
632	+	// without modifying the firmware (through the "M218 T1 X???" command).
633	+	// Remember: you should set the second extruder x-offset to 0 in your slicer.
634	+
635	+	// This is the default power-up mode which can be later using M605.
636	+	#define DEFAULT_DUAL_X_CARRIAGE_MODE DXC_AUTO_PARK_MODE
637	+
638	+	// Default x offset in duplication mode (typically set to half print bed width)
639	+	#define DEFAULT_DUPLICATION_X_OFFSET 100
640	+	#endif
641	+
642	+	// Activate a solenoid on the active extruder with M380. Disable all with M381.
643	+	// Define SOL0_PIN, SOL1_PIN, etc., for each extruder that has a solenoid.
644	+	//#define EXT_SOLENOID
645	+
646	+	// @section homing
647	+
648	+	/**
649	+	* Homing Procedure
650	+	* Homing (G28) does an indefinite move towards the endstops to establish
651	+	* the position of the toolhead relative to the workspace.
652	+	*/
653	+
654	+	//#define SENSORLESS_BACKOFF_MM { 2, 2 } // (mm) Backoff from endstops before sensorless homing
655	+
656	+	#define HOMING_BUMP_MM { 5, 5, 2 } // (mm) Backoff from endstops after first bump
657	+	#define HOMING_BUMP_DIVISOR { 2, 2, 4 } // Re-Bump Speed Divisor (Divides the Homing Feedrate)
658	+
659	+	//#define HOMING_BACKOFF_POST_MM { 2, 2, 2 } // (mm) Backoff from endstops after homing
660	+
661	+	//#define QUICK_HOME // If G28 contains XY do a diagonal move first
662	+	//#define HOME_Y_BEFORE_X // If G28 contains XY home Y before X
663	+	//#define CODEPENDENT_XY_HOMING // If X/Y can't home without homing Y/X first
664	+
665	+	// @section bltouch
666	+
667	+	#if ENABLED(BLTOUCH)
668	+	/**
669	+	* Either: Use the defaults (recommended) or: For special purposes, use the following DEFINES
670	+	* Do not activate settings that the probe might not understand. Clones might misunderstand
671	+	* advanced commands.
672	+	*
673	+	* Note: If the probe is not deploying, do a "Reset" and "Self-Test" and then check the
674	+	* wiring of the BROWN, RED and ORANGE wires.
675	+	*
676	+	* Note: If the trigger signal of your probe is not being recognized, it has been very often
677	+	* because the BLACK and WHITE wires needed to be swapped. They are not "interchangeable"
678	+	* like they would be with a real switch. So please check the wiring first.
679	+	*
680	+	* Settings for all BLTouch and clone probes:
681	+	*/
682	+
683	+	// Safety: The probe needs time to recognize the command.
684	+	// Minimum command delay (ms). Enable and increase if needed.
685	+	#define BLTOUCH_DELAY 300
686	+
687	+	/**
688	+	* Settings for BLTOUCH Classic 1.2, 1.3 or BLTouch Smart 1.0, 2.0, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1, and most clones:
689	+	*/
690	+
691	+	// Feature: Switch into SW mode after a deploy. It makes the output pulse longer. Can be useful
692	+	// in special cases, like noisy or filtered input configurations.
693	+	//#define BLTOUCH_FORCE_SW_MODE
694	+
695	+	/**
696	+	* Settings for BLTouch Smart 3.0 and 3.1
697	+	* Summary:
698	+	* - Voltage modes: 5V and OD (open drain - "logic voltage free") output modes
699	+	* - High-Speed mode
700	+	* - Disable LCD voltage options
701	+	*/
702	+
703	+	/**
704	+	* Danger: Don't activate 5V mode unless attached to a 5V-tolerant controller!
705	+	* V3.0 or 3.1: Set default mode to 5V mode at Marlin startup.
706	+	* If disabled, OD mode is the hard-coded default on 3.0
707	+	* On startup, Marlin will compare its eeprom to this value. If the selected mode
708	+	* differs, a mode set eeprom write will be completed at initialization.
709	+	* Use the option below to force an eeprom write to a V3.1 probe regardless.
710	+	*/
711	+	// #define BLTOUCH_SET_5V_MODE
712	+
713	+	/**
714	+	* Safety: Activate if connecting a probe with an unknown voltage mode.
715	+	* V3.0: Set a probe into mode selected above at Marlin startup. Required for 5V mode on 3.0
716	+	* V3.1: Force a probe with unknown mode into selected mode at Marlin startup ( = Probe EEPROM write )
717	+	* To preserve the life of the probe, use this once then turn it off and re-flash.
718	+	*/
719	+	//#define BLTOUCH_FORCE_MODE_SET
720	+
721	+	/**
722	+	* Use "HIGH SPEED" mode for probing.
723	+	* Danger: Disable if your probe sometimes fails. Only suitable for stable well-adjusted systems.
724	+	* This feature was designed for Delta's with very fast Z moves however higher speed cartesians may function
725	+	* If the machine cannot raise the probe fast enough after a trigger, it may enter a fault state.
726	+	*/
727	+	//#define BLTOUCH_HS_MODE
728	+
729	+	// Safety: Enable voltage mode settings in the LCD menu.
730	+	//#define BLTOUCH_LCD_VOLTAGE_MENU
731	+
732	+	#endif // BLTOUCH
733	+
734	+	// @section extras
735	+
736	+	/**
737	+	* Z Steppers Auto-Alignment
738	+	* Add the G34 command to align multiple Z steppers using a bed probe.
739	+	*/
740	+	//#define Z_STEPPER_AUTO_ALIGN
741	+	#if ENABLED(Z_STEPPER_AUTO_ALIGN)
742	+	// Define probe X and Y positions for Z1, Z2 [, Z3 [, Z4]]
743	+	// If not defined, probe limits will be used.
744	+	// Override with 'M422 S<index> X<pos> Y<pos>'
745	+	//#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_XY { { 10, 190 }, { 100, 10 }, { 190, 190 } }
746	+
747	+	/**
748	+	* Orientation for the automatically-calculated probe positions.
749	+	* Override Z stepper align points with 'M422 S<index> X<pos> Y<pos>'
750	+	*
751	+	* 2 Steppers: (0) (1)
752	+	* \| \| 2 \|
753	+	* \| 1 2 \| \|
754	+	* \| \| 1 \|
755	+	*
756	+	* 3 Steppers: (0) (1) (2) (3)
757	+	* \| 3 \| 1 \| 2 1 \| 2 \|
758	+	* \| \| 3 \| \| 3 \|
759	+	* \| 1 2 \| 2 \| 3 \| 1 \|
760	+	*
761	+	* 4 Steppers: (0) (1) (2) (3)
762	+	* \| 4 3 \| 1 4 \| 2 1 \| 3 2 \|
763	+	* \| \| \| \| \|
764	+	* \| 1 2 \| 2 3 \| 3 4 \| 4 1 \|
765	+	*/
766	+	#ifndef Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_XY
767	+	//#define Z_STEPPERS_ORIENTATION 0
768	+	#endif
769	+
770	+	// Provide Z stepper positions for more rapid convergence in bed alignment.
771	+	// Requires triple stepper drivers (i.e., set NUM_Z_STEPPER_DRIVERS to 3)
772	+	//#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_KNOWN_STEPPER_POSITIONS
773	+	#if ENABLED(Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_KNOWN_STEPPER_POSITIONS)
774	+	// Define Stepper XY positions for Z1, Z2, Z3 corresponding to
775	+	// the Z screw positions in the bed carriage.
776	+	// Define one position per Z stepper in stepper driver order.
777	+	#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_STEPPER_XY { { 210.7, 102.5 }, { 152.6, 220.0 }, { 94.5, 102.5 } }
778	+	#else
779	+	// Amplification factor. Used to scale the correction step up or down in case
780	+	// the stepper (spindle) position is farther out than the test point.
781	+	#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_AMP 1.0 // Use a value > 1.0 NOTE: This may cause instability!
782	+	#endif
783	+
784	+	// On a 300mm bed a 5% grade would give a misalignment of ~1.5cm
785	+	#define G34_MAX_GRADE 5 // (%) Maximum incline that G34 will handle
786	+	#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_ITERATIONS 5 // Number of iterations to apply during alignment
787	+	#define Z_STEPPER_ALIGN_ACC 0.02 // Stop iterating early if the accuracy is better than this
788	+	#define RESTORE_LEVELING_AFTER_G34 // Restore leveling after G34 is done?
789	+	// After G34, re-home Z (G28 Z) or just calculate it from the last probe heights?
790	+	// Re-homing might be more precise in reproducing the actual 'G28 Z' homing height, especially on an uneven bed.
791	+	#define HOME_AFTER_G34
792	+	#endif
793	+
794	+	//
795	+	// Add the G35 command to read bed corners to help adjust screws. Requires a bed probe.
796	+	//
797	+	//#define ASSISTED_TRAMMING
798	+	#if ENABLED(ASSISTED_TRAMMING)
799	+
800	+	// Define positions for probing points, use the hotend as reference not the sensor.
801	+	#define TRAMMING_POINT_XY { { 20, 20 }, { 200, 20 }, { 200, 200 }, { 20, 200 } }
802	+
803	+	// Define positions names for probing points.
804	+	#define TRAMMING_POINT_NAME_1 "Front-Left"
805	+	#define TRAMMING_POINT_NAME_2 "Front-Right"
806	+	#define TRAMMING_POINT_NAME_3 "Back-Right"
807	+	#define TRAMMING_POINT_NAME_4 "Back-Left"
808	+
809	+	#define RESTORE_LEVELING_AFTER_G35 // Enable to restore leveling setup after operation
810	+	//#define REPORT_TRAMMING_MM // Report Z deviation (mm) for each point relative to the first
811	+	//#define ASSISTED_TRAMMING_MENU_ITEM // Add a menu item for Assisted Tramming
812	+
813	+	/**
814	+	* Screw thread:
815	+	* M3: 30 = Clockwise, 31 = Counter-Clockwise
816	+	* M4: 40 = Clockwise, 41 = Counter-Clockwise
817	+	* M5: 50 = Clockwise, 51 = Counter-Clockwise
818	+	*/
819	+	#define TRAMMING_SCREW_THREAD 30
820	+
821	+	#endif
822	+
823	+	// @section motion
824	+
825	+	#define AXIS_RELATIVE_MODES { false, false, false, false }
826	+
827	+	// Add a Duplicate option for well-separated conjoined nozzles
828	+	//#define MULTI_NOZZLE_DUPLICATION
829	+
830	+	// By default pololu step drivers require an active high signal. However, some high power drivers require an active low signal as step.
831	+	#define INVERT_X_STEP_PIN false
832	+	#define INVERT_Y_STEP_PIN false
833	+	#define INVERT_Z_STEP_PIN false
834	+	#define INVERT_E_STEP_PIN false
835	+
836	+	/**
837	+	* Idle Stepper Shutdown
838	+	* Set DISABLE_INACTIVE_? 'true' to shut down axis steppers after an idle period.
839	+	* The Deactive Time can be overridden with M18 and M84. Set to 0 for No Timeout.
840	+	*/
841	+	#define DEFAULT_STEPPER_DEACTIVE_TIME 120
842	+	#define DISABLE_INACTIVE_X true
843	+	#define DISABLE_INACTIVE_Y true
844	+	#define DISABLE_INACTIVE_Z true // Set 'false' if the nozzle could fall onto your printed part!
845	+	#define DISABLE_INACTIVE_E true
846	+
847	+	// If the Nozzle or Bed falls when the Z stepper is disabled, set its resting position here.
848	+	//#define Z_AFTER_DEACTIVATE Z_HOME_POS
849	+
850	+	//#define HOME_AFTER_DEACTIVATE // Require rehoming after steppers are deactivated
851	+
852	+	// Default Minimum Feedrates for printing and travel moves
853	+	#define DEFAULT_MINIMUMFEEDRATE 0.0 // (mm/s) Minimum feedrate. Set with M205 S.
854	+	#define DEFAULT_MINTRAVELFEEDRATE 0.0 // (mm/s) Minimum travel feedrate. Set with M205 T.
855	+
856	+	// Minimum time that a segment needs to take as the buffer gets emptied
857	+	#define DEFAULT_MINSEGMENTTIME 20000 // (µs) Set with M205 B.
858	+
859	+	// Slow down the machine if the lookahead buffer is (by default) half full.
860	+	// Increase the slowdown divisor for larger buffer sizes.
861	+	#define SLOWDOWN
862	+	#if ENABLED(SLOWDOWN)
863	+	#define SLOWDOWN_DIVISOR 2
864	+	#endif
865	+
866	+	/**
867	+	* XY Frequency limit
868	+	* Reduce resonance by limiting the frequency of small zigzag infill moves.
869	+	* See https://hydraraptor.blogspot.com/2010/12/frequency-limit.html
870	+	* Use M201 F<freq> G<min%> to change limits at runtime.
871	+	*/
872	+	//#define XY_FREQUENCY_LIMIT 10 // (Hz) Maximum frequency of small zigzag infill moves. Set with M201 F<hertz>.
873	+	#ifdef XY_FREQUENCY_LIMIT
874	+	#define XY_FREQUENCY_MIN_PERCENT 5 // (percent) Minimum FR percentage to apply. Set with M201 G<min%>.
875	+	#endif
876	+
877	+	// Minimum planner junction speed. Sets the default minimum speed the planner plans for at the end
878	+	// of the buffer and all stops. This should not be much greater than zero and should only be changed
879	+	// if unwanted behavior is observed on a user's machine when running at very slow speeds.
880	+	#define MINIMUM_PLANNER_SPEED 0.05 // (mm/s)
881	+
882	+	//
883	+	// Backlash Compensation
884	+	// Adds extra movement to axes on direction-changes to account for backlash.
885	+	//
886	+	//#define BACKLASH_COMPENSATION
887	+	#if ENABLED(BACKLASH_COMPENSATION)
888	+	// Define values for backlash distance and correction.
889	+	// If BACKLASH_GCODE is enabled these values are the defaults.
890	+	#define BACKLASH_DISTANCE_MM { 0, 0, 0 } // (mm)
891	+	#define BACKLASH_CORRECTION 0.0 // 0.0 = no correction; 1.0 = full correction
892	+
893	+	// Set BACKLASH_SMOOTHING_MM to spread backlash correction over multiple segments
894	+	// to reduce print artifacts. (Enabling this is costly in memory and computation!)
895	+	//#define BACKLASH_SMOOTHING_MM 3 // (mm)
896	+
897	+	// Add runtime configuration and tuning of backlash values (M425)
898	+	//#define BACKLASH_GCODE
899	+
900	+	#if ENABLED(BACKLASH_GCODE)
901	+	// Measure the Z backlash when probing (G29) and set with "M425 Z"
902	+	#define MEASURE_BACKLASH_WHEN_PROBING
903	+
904	+	#if ENABLED(MEASURE_BACKLASH_WHEN_PROBING)
905	+	// When measuring, the probe will move up to BACKLASH_MEASUREMENT_LIMIT
906	+	// mm away from point of contact in BACKLASH_MEASUREMENT_RESOLUTION
907	+	// increments while checking for the contact to be broken.
908	+	#define BACKLASH_MEASUREMENT_LIMIT 0.5 // (mm)
909	+	#define BACKLASH_MEASUREMENT_RESOLUTION 0.005 // (mm)
910	+	#define BACKLASH_MEASUREMENT_FEEDRATE Z_PROBE_SPEED_SLOW // (mm/min)
911	+	#endif
912	+	#endif
913	+	#endif
914	+
915	+	/**
916	+	* Automatic backlash, position and hotend offset calibration
917	+	*
918	+	* Enable G425 to run automatic calibration using an electrically-
919	+	* conductive cube, bolt, or washer mounted on the bed.
920	+	*
921	+	* G425 uses the probe to touch the top and sides of the calibration object
922	+	* on the bed and measures and/or correct positional offsets, axis backlash
923	+	* and hotend offsets.
924	+	*
925	+	* Note: HOTEND_OFFSET and CALIBRATION_OBJECT_CENTER must be set to within
926	+	* ±5mm of true values for G425 to succeed.
927	+	*/
928	+	//#define CALIBRATION_GCODE
929	+	#if ENABLED(CALIBRATION_GCODE)
930	+
931	+	//#define CALIBRATION_SCRIPT_PRE "M117 Starting Auto-Calibration\nT0\nG28\nG12\nM117 Calibrating..."
932	+	//#define CALIBRATION_SCRIPT_POST "M500\nM117 Calibration data saved"
933	+
934	+	#define CALIBRATION_MEASUREMENT_RESOLUTION 0.01 // mm
935	+
936	+	#define CALIBRATION_FEEDRATE_SLOW 60 // mm/min
937	+	#define CALIBRATION_FEEDRATE_FAST 1200 // mm/min
938	+	#define CALIBRATION_FEEDRATE_TRAVEL 3000 // mm/min
939	+
940	+	// The following parameters refer to the conical section of the nozzle tip.
941	+	#define CALIBRATION_NOZZLE_TIP_HEIGHT 1.0 // mm
942	+	#define CALIBRATION_NOZZLE_OUTER_DIAMETER 2.0 // mm
943	+
944	+	// Uncomment to enable reporting (required for "G425 V", but consumes PROGMEM).
945	+	//#define CALIBRATION_REPORTING
946	+
947	+	// The true location and dimension the cube/bolt/washer on the bed.
948	+	#define CALIBRATION_OBJECT_CENTER { 264.0, -22.0, -2.0 } // mm
949	+	#define CALIBRATION_OBJECT_DIMENSIONS { 10.0, 10.0, 10.0 } // mm
950	+
951	+	// Comment out any sides which are unreachable by the probe. For best
952	+	// auto-calibration results, all sides must be reachable.
953	+	#define CALIBRATION_MEASURE_RIGHT
954	+	#define CALIBRATION_MEASURE_FRONT
955	+	#define CALIBRATION_MEASURE_LEFT
956	+	#define CALIBRATION_MEASURE_BACK
957	+
958	+	// Probing at the exact top center only works if the center is flat. If
959	+	// probing on a screwhead or hollow washer, probe near the edges.
960	+	//#define CALIBRATION_MEASURE_AT_TOP_EDGES
961	+
962	+	// Define the pin to read during calibration
963	+	#ifndef CALIBRATION_PIN
964	+	//#define CALIBRATION_PIN -1 // Define here to override the default pin
965	+	#define CALIBRATION_PIN_INVERTING false // Set to true to invert the custom pin
966	+	//#define CALIBRATION_PIN_PULLDOWN
967	+	#define CALIBRATION_PIN_PULLUP
968	+	#endif
969	+	#endif
970	+
971	+	/**
972	+	* Adaptive Step Smoothing increases the resolution of multi-axis moves, particularly at step frequencies
973	+	* below 1kHz (for AVR) or 10kHz (for ARM), where aliasing between axes in multi-axis moves causes audible
974	+	* vibration and surface artifacts. The algorithm adapts to provide the best possible step smoothing at the
975	+	* lowest stepping frequencies.
976	+	*/
977	+	//#define ADAPTIVE_STEP_SMOOTHING
978	+
979	+	/**
980	+	* Custom Microstepping
981	+	* Override as-needed for your setup. Up to 3 MS pins are supported.
982	+	*/
983	+	//#define MICROSTEP1 LOW,LOW,LOW
984	+	//#define MICROSTEP2 HIGH,LOW,LOW
985	+	//#define MICROSTEP4 LOW,HIGH,LOW
986	+	//#define MICROSTEP8 HIGH,HIGH,LOW
987	+	//#define MICROSTEP16 LOW,LOW,HIGH
988	+	//#define MICROSTEP32 HIGH,LOW,HIGH
989	+
990	+	// Microstep settings (Requires a board with pins named X_MS1, X_MS2, etc.)
991	+	#define MICROSTEP_MODES { 16, 16, 16, 16, 16, 16 } // [1,2,4,8,16]
992	+
993	+	/**
994	+	* @section stepper motor current
995	+	*
996	+	* Some boards have a means of setting the stepper motor current via firmware.
997	+	*
998	+	* The power on motor currents are set by:
999	+	* PWM_MOTOR_CURRENT - used by MINIRAMBO & ULTIMAIN_2
1000	+	* known compatible chips: A4982
1001	+	* DIGIPOT_MOTOR_CURRENT - used by BQ_ZUM_MEGA_3D, RAMBO & SCOOVO_X9H
1002	+	* known compatible chips: AD5206
1003	+	* DAC_MOTOR_CURRENT_DEFAULT - used by PRINTRBOARD_REVF & RIGIDBOARD_V2
1004	+	* known compatible chips: MCP4728
1005	+	* DIGIPOT_I2C_MOTOR_CURRENTS - used by 5DPRINT, AZTEEG_X3_PRO, AZTEEG_X5_MINI_WIFI, MIGHTYBOARD_REVE
1006	+	* known compatible chips: MCP4451, MCP4018
1007	+	*
1008	+	* Motor currents can also be set by M907 - M910 and by the LCD.
1009	+	* M907 - applies to all.
1010	+	* M908 - BQ_ZUM_MEGA_3D, RAMBO, PRINTRBOARD_REVF, RIGIDBOARD_V2 & SCOOVO_X9H
1011	+	* M909, M910 & LCD - only PRINTRBOARD_REVF & RIGIDBOARD_V2
1012	+	*/
1013	+	//#define PWM_MOTOR_CURRENT { 1300, 1300, 1250 } // Values in milliamps
1014	+	//#define DIGIPOT_MOTOR_CURRENT { 135,135,135,135,135 } // Values 0-255 (RAMBO 135 = ~0.75A, 185 = ~1A)
1015	+	//#define DAC_MOTOR_CURRENT_DEFAULT { 70, 80, 90, 80 } // Default drive percent - X, Y, Z, E axis
1016	+
1017	+	/**
1018	+	* I2C-based DIGIPOTs (e.g., Azteeg X3 Pro)
1019	+	*/
1020	+	//#define DIGIPOT_MCP4018 // Requires https://github.com/stawel/SlowSoftI2CMaster
1021	+	//#define DIGIPOT_MCP4451
1022	+	#if EITHER(DIGIPOT_MCP4018, DIGIPOT_MCP4451)
1023	+	#define DIGIPOT_I2C_NUM_CHANNELS 8 // 5DPRINT:4 AZTEEG_X3_PRO:8 MKS_SBASE:5 MIGHTYBOARD_REVE:5
1024	+
1025	+	// Actual motor currents in Amps. The number of entries must match DIGIPOT_I2C_NUM_CHANNELS.
1026	+	// These correspond to the physical drivers, so be mindful if the order is changed.
1027	+	#define DIGIPOT_I2C_MOTOR_CURRENTS { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 } // AZTEEG_X3_PRO
1028	+
1029	+	//#define DIGIPOT_USE_RAW_VALUES // Use DIGIPOT_MOTOR_CURRENT raw wiper values (instead of A4988 motor currents)
1030	+
1031	+	/**
1032	+	* Common slave addresses:
1033	+	*
1034	+	* A (A shifted) B (B shifted) IC
1035	+	* Smoothie 0x2C (0x58) 0x2D (0x5A) MCP4451
1036	+	* AZTEEG_X3_PRO 0x2C (0x58) 0x2E (0x5C) MCP4451
1037	+	* AZTEEG_X5_MINI 0x2C (0x58) 0x2E (0x5C) MCP4451
1038	+	* AZTEEG_X5_MINI_WIFI 0x58 0x5C MCP4451
1039	+	* MIGHTYBOARD_REVE 0x2F (0x5E) MCP4018
1040	+	*/
1041	+	//#define DIGIPOT_I2C_ADDRESS_A 0x2C // Unshifted slave address for first DIGIPOT
1042	+	//#define DIGIPOT_I2C_ADDRESS_B 0x2D // Unshifted slave address for second DIGIPOT
1043	+	#endif
1044	+
1045	+	//===========================================================================
1046	+	//=============================Additional Features===========================
1047	+	//===========================================================================
1048	+
1049	+	// @section lcd
1050	+
1051	+	#if EITHER(ULTIPANEL, EXTENSIBLE_UI)
1052	+	#define MANUAL_FEEDRATE { 5060, 5060, 460, 260 } // (mm/min) Feedrates for manual moves along X, Y, Z, E from panel
1053	+	#define SHORT_MANUAL_Z_MOVE 0.025 // (mm) Smallest manual Z move (< 0.1mm)
1054	+	#if ENABLED(ULTIPANEL)
1055	+	#define MANUAL_E_MOVES_RELATIVE // Display extruder move distance rather than "position"
1056	+	#define ULTIPANEL_FEEDMULTIPLY // Encoder sets the feedrate multiplier on the Status Screen
1057	+	#endif
1058	+	#endif
1059	+
1060	+	// Change values more rapidly when the encoder is rotated faster
1061	+	#define ENCODER_RATE_MULTIPLIER
1062	+	#if ENABLED(ENCODER_RATE_MULTIPLIER)
1063	+	#define ENCODER_10X_STEPS_PER_SEC 30 // (steps/s) Encoder rate for 10x speed
1064	+	#define ENCODER_100X_STEPS_PER_SEC 80 // (steps/s) Encoder rate for 100x speed
1065	+	#endif
1066	+
1067	+	// Play a beep when the feedrate is changed from the Status Screen
1068	+	//#define BEEP_ON_FEEDRATE_CHANGE
1069	+	#if ENABLED(BEEP_ON_FEEDRATE_CHANGE)
1070	+	#define FEEDRATE_CHANGE_BEEP_DURATION 10
1071	+	#define FEEDRATE_CHANGE_BEEP_FREQUENCY 440
1072	+	#endif
1073	+
1074	+	#if HAS_LCD_MENU
1075	+
1076	+	// Add Probe Z Offset calibration to the Z Probe Offsets menu
1077	+	#if HAS_BED_PROBE
1078	+	//#define PROBE_OFFSET_WIZARD
1079	+	#if ENABLED(PROBE_OFFSET_WIZARD)
1080	+	#define PROBE_OFFSET_START -4.0 // Estimated nozzle-to-probe Z offset, plus a little extra
1081	+	#endif
1082	+	#endif
1083	+
1084	+	// Include a page of printer information in the LCD Main Menu
1085	+	#define LCD_INFO_MENU
1086	+	#if ENABLED(LCD_INFO_MENU)
1087	+	//#define LCD_PRINTER_INFO_IS_BOOTSCREEN // Show bootscreen(s) instead of Printer Info pages
1088	+	#endif
1089	+
1090	+	// BACK menu items keep the highlight at the top
1091	+	//#define TURBO_BACK_MENU_ITEM
1092	+
1093	+	/**
1094	+	* LED Control Menu
1095	+	* Add LED Control to the LCD menu
1096	+	*/
1097	+	//#define LED_CONTROL_MENU
1098	+	#if ENABLED(LED_CONTROL_MENU)
1099	+	#define LED_COLOR_PRESETS // Enable the Preset Color menu option
1100	+	//#define NEO2_COLOR_PRESETS // Enable a second NeoPixel Preset Color menu option
1101	+	#if ENABLED(LED_COLOR_PRESETS)
1102	+	#define LED_USER_PRESET_RED 255 // User defined RED value
1103	+	#define LED_USER_PRESET_GREEN 128 // User defined GREEN value
1104	+	#define LED_USER_PRESET_BLUE 0 // User defined BLUE value
1105	+	#define LED_USER_PRESET_WHITE 255 // User defined WHITE value
1106	+	#define LED_USER_PRESET_BRIGHTNESS 255 // User defined intensity
1107	+	//#define LED_USER_PRESET_STARTUP // Have the printer display the user preset color on startup
1108	+	#endif
1109	+	#if ENABLED(NEO2_COLOR_PRESETS)
1110	+	#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_RED 255 // User defined RED value
1111	+	#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_GREEN 128 // User defined GREEN value
1112	+	#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_BLUE 0 // User defined BLUE value
1113	+	#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_WHITE 255 // User defined WHITE value
1114	+	#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_BRIGHTNESS 255 // User defined intensity
1115	+	//#define NEO2_USER_PRESET_STARTUP // Have the printer display the user preset color on startup for the second strip
1116	+	#endif
1117	+	#endif
1118	+
1119	+	#endif // HAS_LCD_MENU
1120	+
1121	+	// Scroll a longer status message into view
1122	+	#define STATUS_MESSAGE_SCROLLING
1123	+
1124	+	// On the Info Screen, display XY with one decimal place when possible
1125	+	//#define LCD_DECIMAL_SMALL_XY
1126	+
1127	+	// The timeout (in ms) to return to the status screen from sub-menus
1128	+	//#define LCD_TIMEOUT_TO_STATUS 15000
1129	+
1130	+	// Add an 'M73' G-code to set the current percentage
1131	+	//#define LCD_SET_PROGRESS_MANUALLY
1132	+
1133	+	// Show the E position (filament used) during printing
1134	+	//#define LCD_SHOW_E_TOTAL
1135	+
1136	+	#if ENABLED(SHOW_BOOTSCREEN)
1137	+	#define BOOTSCREEN_TIMEOUT 4000 // (ms) Total Duration to display the boot screen(s)
1138	+	#endif
1139	+
1140	+	#if EITHER(SDSUPPORT, LCD_SET_PROGRESS_MANUALLY) && ANY(HAS_MARLINUI_U8GLIB, HAS_MARLINUI_HD44780, IS_TFTGLCD_PANEL)
1141	+	//#define SHOW_REMAINING_TIME // Display estimated time to completion
1142	+	#if ENABLED(SHOW_REMAINING_TIME)
1143	+	//#define USE_M73_REMAINING_TIME // Use remaining time from M73 command instead of estimation
1144	+	//#define ROTATE_PROGRESS_DISPLAY // Display (P)rogress, (E)lapsed, and (R)emaining time
1145	+	#endif
1146	+
1147	+	#if HAS_MARLINUI_U8GLIB
1148	+	//#define PRINT_PROGRESS_SHOW_DECIMALS // Show progress with decimal digits
1149	+	#endif
1150	+
1151	+	#if EITHER(HAS_MARLINUI_HD44780, IS_TFTGLCD_PANEL)
1152	+	//#define LCD_PROGRESS_BAR // Show a progress bar on HD44780 LCDs for SD printing
1153	+	#if ENABLED(LCD_PROGRESS_BAR)
1154	+	#define PROGRESS_BAR_BAR_TIME 2000 // (ms) Amount of time to show the bar
1155	+	#define PROGRESS_BAR_MSG_TIME 3000 // (ms) Amount of time to show the status message
1156	+	#define PROGRESS_MSG_EXPIRE 0 // (ms) Amount of time to retain the status message (0=forever)
1157	+	//#define PROGRESS_MSG_ONCE // Show the message for MSG_TIME then clear it
1158	+	//#define LCD_PROGRESS_BAR_TEST // Add a menu item to test the progress bar
1159	+	#endif
1160	+	#endif
1161	+	#endif
1162	+
1163	+	#if ENABLED(SDSUPPORT)
1164	+
1165	+	// The standard SD detect circuit reads LOW when media is inserted and HIGH when empty.
1166	+	// Enable this option and set to HIGH if your SD cards are incorrectly detected.
1167	+	//#define SD_DETECT_STATE HIGH
1168	+
1169	+	//#define SDCARD_READONLY // Read-only SD card (to save over 2K of flash)
1170	+
1171	+	#define SD_PROCEDURE_DEPTH 1 // Increase if you need more nested M32 calls
1172	+
1173	+	#define SD_FINISHED_STEPPERRELEASE true // Disable steppers when SD Print is finished
1174	+	#define SD_FINISHED_RELEASECOMMAND "M84 X Y Z E" // Use "M84XYE" to keep Z enabled so your bed stays in place
1175	+
1176	+	// Reverse SD sort to show "more recent" files first, according to the card's FAT.
1177	+	// Since the FAT gets out of order with usage, SDCARD_SORT_ALPHA is recommended.
1178	+	#define SDCARD_RATHERRECENTFIRST
1179	+
1180	+	#define SD_MENU_CONFIRM_START // Confirm the selected SD file before printing
1181	+
1182	+	//#define MENU_ADDAUTOSTART // Add a menu option to run auto#.g files
1183	+
1184	+	#define EVENT_GCODE_SD_ABORT "G28XY" // G-code to run on SD Abort Print (e.g., "G28XY" or "G27")
1185	+
1186	+	#if ENABLED(PRINTER_EVENT_LEDS)
1187	+	#define PE_LEDS_COMPLETED_TIME (30*60) // (seconds) Time to keep the LED "done" color before restoring normal illumination
1188	+	#endif
1189	+
1190	+	/**
1191	+	* Continue after Power-Loss (Creality3D)
1192	+	*
1193	+	* Store the current state to the SD Card at the start of each layer
1194	+	* during SD printing. If the recovery file is found at boot time, present
1195	+	* an option on the LCD screen to continue the print from the last-known
1196	+	* point in the file.
1197	+	*/
1198	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_RECOVERY
1199	+	#if ENABLED(POWER_LOSS_RECOVERY)
1200	+	#define PLR_ENABLED_DEFAULT false // Power Loss Recovery enabled by default. (Set with 'M413 Sn' & M500)
1201	+	//#define BACKUP_POWER_SUPPLY // Backup power / UPS to move the steppers on power loss
1202	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_RECOVER_ZHOME // Z homing is needed for proper recovery. 99.9% of the time this should be disabled!
1203	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_ZRAISE 2 // (mm) Z axis raise on resume (on power loss with UPS)
1204	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_PIN 44 // Pin to detect power loss. Set to -1 to disable default pin on boards without module.
1205	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_STATE HIGH // State of pin indicating power loss
1206	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_PULL // Set pullup / pulldown as appropriate
1207	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_PURGE_LEN 20 // (mm) Length of filament to purge on resume
1208	+	//#define POWER_LOSS_RETRACT_LEN 10 // (mm) Length of filament to retract on fail. Requires backup power.
1209	+
1210	+	// Without a POWER_LOSS_PIN the following option helps reduce wear on the SD card,
1211	+	// especially with "vase mode" printing. Set too high and vases cannot be continued.
1212	+	#define POWER_LOSS_MIN_Z_CHANGE 0.05 // (mm) Minimum Z change before saving power-loss data
1213	+	#endif
1214	+
1215	+	/**
1216	+	* Sort SD file listings in alphabetical order.
1217	+	*
1218	+	* With this option enabled, items on SD cards will be sorted
1219	+	* by name for easier navigation.
1220	+	*
1221	+	* By default...
1222	+	*
1223	+	* - Use the slowest -but safest- method for sorting.
1224	+	* - Folders are sorted to the top.
1225	+	* - The sort key is statically allocated.
1226	+	* - No added G-code (M34) support.
1227	+	* - 40 item sorting limit. (Items after the first 40 are unsorted.)
1228	+	*
1229	+	* SD sorting uses static allocation (as set by SDSORT_LIMIT), allowing the
1230	+	* compiler to calculate the worst-case usage and throw an error if the SRAM
1231	+	* limit is exceeded.
1232	+	*
1233	+	* - SDSORT_USES_RAM provides faster sorting via a static directory buffer.
1234	+	* - SDSORT_USES_STACK does the same, but uses a local stack-based buffer.
1235	+	* - SDSORT_CACHE_NAMES will retain the sorted file listing in RAM. (Expensive!)
1236	+	* - SDSORT_DYNAMIC_RAM only uses RAM when the SD menu is visible. (Use with caution!)
1237	+	*/
1238	+	//#define SDCARD_SORT_ALPHA
1239	+
1240	+	// SD Card Sorting options
1241	+	#if ENABLED(SDCARD_SORT_ALPHA)
1242	+	#define SDSORT_LIMIT 40 // Maximum number of sorted items (10-256). Costs 27 bytes each.
1243	+	#define FOLDER_SORTING -1 // -1=above 0=none 1=below
1244	+	#define SDSORT_GCODE false // Allow turning sorting on/off with LCD and M34 G-code.
1245	+	#define SDSORT_USES_RAM false // Pre-allocate a static array for faster pre-sorting.
1246	+	#define SDSORT_USES_STACK false // Prefer the stack for pre-sorting to give back some SRAM. (Negated by next 2 options.)
1247	+	#define SDSORT_CACHE_NAMES false // Keep sorted items in RAM longer for speedy performance. Most expensive option.
1248	+	#define SDSORT_DYNAMIC_RAM false // Use dynamic allocation (within SD menus). Least expensive option. Set SDSORT_LIMIT before use!
1249	+	#define SDSORT_CACHE_VFATS 2 // Maximum number of 13-byte VFAT entries to use for sorting.
1250	+	// Note: Only affects SCROLL_LONG_FILENAMES with SDSORT_CACHE_NAMES but not SDSORT_DYNAMIC_RAM.
1251	+	#endif
1252	+
1253	+	// This allows hosts to request long names for files and folders with M33
1254	+	//#define LONG_FILENAME_HOST_SUPPORT
1255	+
1256	+	// Enable this option to scroll long filenames in the SD card menu
1257	+	#define SCROLL_LONG_FILENAMES
1258	+
1259	+	// Leave the heaters on after Stop Print (not recommended!)
1260	+	//#define SD_ABORT_NO_COOLDOWN
1261	+
1262	+	/**
1263	+	* This option allows you to abort SD printing when any endstop is triggered.
1264	+	* This feature must be enabled with "M540 S1" or from the LCD menu.
1265	+	* To have any effect, endstops must be enabled during SD printing.
1266	+	*/
1267	+	//#define SD_ABORT_ON_ENDSTOP_HIT
1268	+
1269	+	/**
1270	+	* This option makes it easier to print the same SD Card file again.
1271	+	* On print completion the LCD Menu will open with the file selected.
1272	+	* You can just click to start the print, or navigate elsewhere.
1273	+	*/
1274	+	//#define SD_REPRINT_LAST_SELECTED_FILE
1275	+
1276	+	/**
1277	+	* Auto-report SdCard status with M27 S<seconds>
1278	+	*/
1279	+	//#define AUTO_REPORT_SD_STATUS
1280	+
1281	+	/**
1282	+	* Support for USB thumb drives using an Arduino USB Host Shield or
1283	+	* equivalent MAX3421E breakout board. The USB thumb drive will appear
1284	+	* to Marlin as an SD card.
1285	+	*
1286	+	* The MAX3421E can be assigned the same pins as the SD card reader, with
1287	+	* the following pin mapping:
1288	+	*
1289	+	* SCLK, MOSI, MISO --> SCLK, MOSI, MISO
1290	+	* INT --> SD_DETECT_PIN [1]
1291	+	* SS --> SDSS
1292	+	*
1293	+	* [1] On AVR an interrupt-capable pin is best for UHS3 compatibility.
1294	+	*/
1295	+	//#define USB_FLASH_DRIVE_SUPPORT
1296	+	#if ENABLED(USB_FLASH_DRIVE_SUPPORT)
1297	+	#define USB_CS_PIN SDSS
1298	+	#define USB_INTR_PIN SD_DETECT_PIN
1299	+
1300	+	/**
1301	+	* USB Host Shield Library
1302	+	*
1303	+	* - UHS2 uses no interrupts and has been production-tested
1304	+	* on a LulzBot TAZ Pro with a 32-bit Archim board.
1305	+	*
1306	+	* - UHS3 is newer code with better USB compatibility. But it
1307	+	* is less tested and is known to interfere with Servos.
1308	+	* [1] This requires USB_INTR_PIN to be interrupt-capable.
1309	+	*/
1310	+	//#define USE_UHS3_USB
1311	+	#endif
1312	+
1313	+	/**
1314	+	* When using a bootloader that supports SD-Firmware-Flashing,
1315	+	* add a menu item to activate SD-FW-Update on the next reboot.
1316	+	*
1317	+	* Requires ATMEGA2560 (Arduino Mega)
1318	+	*
1319	+	* Tested with this bootloader:
1320	+	* https://github.com/FleetProbe/MicroBridge-Arduino-ATMega2560
1321	+	*/
1322	+	//#define SD_FIRMWARE_UPDATE
1323	+	#if ENABLED(SD_FIRMWARE_UPDATE)
1324	+	#define SD_FIRMWARE_UPDATE_EEPROM_ADDR 0x1FF
1325	+	#define SD_FIRMWARE_UPDATE_ACTIVE_VALUE 0xF0
1326	+	#define SD_FIRMWARE_UPDATE_INACTIVE_VALUE 0xFF
1327	+	#endif
1328	+
1329	+	// Add an optimized binary file transfer mode, initiated with 'M28 B1'
1330	+	//#define BINARY_FILE_TRANSFER
1331	+
1332	+	/**
1333	+	* Set this option to one of the following (or the board's defaults apply):
1334	+	*
1335	+	* LCD - Use the SD drive in the external LCD controller.
1336	+	* ONBOARD - Use the SD drive on the control board. (No SD_DETECT_PIN. M21 to init.)
1337	+	* CUSTOM_CABLE - Use a custom cable to access the SD (as defined in a pins file).
1338	+	*
1339	+	* :[ 'LCD', 'ONBOARD', 'CUSTOM_CABLE' ]
1340	+	*/
1341	+	//#define SDCARD_CONNECTION LCD
1342	+
1343	+	#endif // SDSUPPORT
1344	+
1345	+	/**
1346	+	* By default an onboard SD card reader may be shared as a USB mass-
1347	+	* storage device. This option hides the SD card from the host PC.
1348	+	*/
1349	+	//#define NO_SD_HOST_DRIVE // Disable SD Card access over USB (for security).
1350	+
1351	+	/**
1352	+	* Additional options for Graphical Displays
1353	+	*
1354	+	* Use the optimizations here to improve printing performance,
1355	+	* which can be adversely affected by graphical display drawing,
1356	+	* especially when doing several short moves, and when printing
1357	+	* on DELTA and SCARA machines.
1358	+	*
1359	+	* Some of these options may result in the display lagging behind
1360	+	* controller events, as there is a trade-off between reliable
1361	+	* printing performance versus fast display updates.
1362	+	*/
1363	+	#if HAS_MARLINUI_U8GLIB
1364	+	// Show SD percentage next to the progress bar
1365	+	//#define DOGM_SD_PERCENT
1366	+
1367	+	// Save many cycles by drawing a hollow frame or no frame on the Info Screen
1368	+	//#define XYZ_NO_FRAME
1369	+	#define XYZ_HOLLOW_FRAME
1370	+
1371	+	// Enable to save many cycles by drawing a hollow frame on Menu Screens
1372	+	#define MENU_HOLLOW_FRAME
1373	+
1374	+	// A bigger font is available for edit items. Costs 3120 bytes of PROGMEM.
1375	+	// Western only. Not available for Cyrillic, Kana, Turkish, Greek, or Chinese.
1376	+	//#define USE_BIG_EDIT_FONT
1377	+
1378	+	// A smaller font may be used on the Info Screen. Costs 2434 bytes of PROGMEM.
1379	+	// Western only. Not available for Cyrillic, Kana, Turkish, Greek, or Chinese.
1380	+	//#define USE_SMALL_INFOFONT
1381	+
1382	+	// Swap the CW/CCW indicators in the graphics overlay
1383	+	//#define OVERLAY_GFX_REVERSE
1384	+
1385	+	/**
1386	+	* ST7920-based LCDs can emulate a 16 x 4 character display using
1387	+	* the ST7920 character-generator for very fast screen updates.
1388	+	* Enable LIGHTWEIGHT_UI to use this special display mode.
1389	+	*
1390	+	* Since LIGHTWEIGHT_UI has limited space, the position and status
1391	+	* message occupy the same line. Set STATUS_EXPIRE_SECONDS to the
1392	+	* length of time to display the status message before clearing.
1393	+	*
1394	+	* Set STATUS_EXPIRE_SECONDS to zero to never clear the status.
1395	+	* This will prevent position updates from being displayed.
1396	+	*/
1397	+	#if ENABLED(U8GLIB_ST7920)
1398	+	// Enable this option and reduce the value to optimize screen updates.
1399	+	// The normal delay is 10µs. Use the lowest value that still gives a reliable display.
1400	+	//#define DOGM_SPI_DELAY_US 5
1401	+
1402	+	//#define LIGHTWEIGHT_UI
1403	+	#if ENABLED(LIGHTWEIGHT_UI)
1404	+	#define STATUS_EXPIRE_SECONDS 20
1405	+	#endif
1406	+	#endif
1407	+
1408	+	/**
1409	+	* Status (Info) Screen customizations
1410	+	* These options may affect code size and screen render time.
1411	+	* Custom status screens can forcibly override these settings.
1412	+	*/
1413	+	//#define STATUS_COMBINE_HEATERS // Use combined heater images instead of separate ones
1414	+	//#define STATUS_HOTEND_NUMBERLESS // Use plain hotend icons instead of numbered ones (with 2+ hotends)
1415	+	#define STATUS_HOTEND_INVERTED // Show solid nozzle bitmaps when heating (Requires STATUS_HOTEND_ANIM)
1416	+	#define STATUS_HOTEND_ANIM // Use a second bitmap to indicate hotend heating
1417	+	#define STATUS_BED_ANIM // Use a second bitmap to indicate bed heating
1418	+	#define STATUS_CHAMBER_ANIM // Use a second bitmap to indicate chamber heating
1419	+	//#define STATUS_CUTTER_ANIM // Use a second bitmap to indicate spindle / laser active
1420	+	//#define STATUS_ALT_BED_BITMAP // Use the alternative bed bitmap
1421	+	//#define STATUS_ALT_FAN_BITMAP // Use the alternative fan bitmap
1422	+	//#define STATUS_FAN_FRAMES 3 // :[0,1,2,3,4] Number of fan animation frames
1423	+	//#define STATUS_HEAT_PERCENT // Show heating in a progress bar
1424	+	//#define BOOT_MARLIN_LOGO_SMALL // Show a smaller Marlin logo on the Boot Screen (saving 399 bytes of flash)
1425	+	//#define BOOT_MARLIN_LOGO_ANIMATED // Animated Marlin logo. Costs ~‭3260 (or ~940) bytes of PROGMEM.
1426	+
1427	+	// Frivolous Game Options
1428	+	//#define MARLIN_BRICKOUT
1429	+	//#define MARLIN_INVADERS
1430	+	//#define MARLIN_SNAKE
1431	+	//#define GAMES_EASTER_EGG // Add extra blank lines above the "Games" sub-menu
1432	+
1433	+	#endif // HAS_MARLINUI_U8GLIB
1434	+
1435	+	//
1436	+	// Additional options for DGUS / DWIN displays
1437	+	//
1438	+	#if HAS_DGUS_LCD
1439	+	#define LCD_SERIAL_PORT 3
1440	+	#define LCD_BAUDRATE 115200
1441	+
1442	+	#define DGUS_RX_BUFFER_SIZE 128
1443	+	#define DGUS_TX_BUFFER_SIZE 48
1444	+	//#define SERIAL_STATS_RX_BUFFER_OVERRUNS // Fix Rx overrun situation (Currently only for AVR)
1445	+
1446	+	#define DGUS_UPDATE_INTERVAL_MS 500 // (ms) Interval between automatic screen updates
1447	+
1448	+	#if EITHER(DGUS_LCD_UI_FYSETC, DGUS_LCD_UI_HIPRECY)
1449	+	#define DGUS_PRINT_FILENAME // Display the filename during printing
1450	+	#define DGUS_PREHEAT_UI // Display a preheat screen during heatup
1451	+
1452	+	#if ENABLED(DGUS_LCD_UI_FYSETC)
1453	+	//#define DGUS_UI_MOVE_DIS_OPTION // Disabled by default for UI_FYSETC
1454	+	#else
1455	+	#define DGUS_UI_MOVE_DIS_OPTION // Enabled by default for UI_HIPRECY
1456	+	#endif
1457	+
1458	+	#define DGUS_FILAMENT_LOADUNLOAD
1459	+	#if ENABLED(DGUS_FILAMENT_LOADUNLOAD)
1460	+	#define DGUS_FILAMENT_PURGE_LENGTH 10
1461	+	#define DGUS_FILAMENT_LOAD_LENGTH_PER_TIME 0.5 // (mm) Adjust in proportion to DGUS_UPDATE_INTERVAL_MS
1462	+	#endif
1463	+
1464	+	#define DGUS_UI_WAITING // Show a "waiting" screen between some screens
1465	+	#if ENABLED(DGUS_UI_WAITING)
1466	+	#define DGUS_UI_WAITING_STATUS 10
1467	+	#define DGUS_UI_WAITING_STATUS_PERIOD 8 // Increase to slower waiting status looping
1468	+	#endif
1469	+	#endif
1470	+	#endif // HAS_DGUS_LCD
1471	+
1472	+	//
1473	+	// Touch UI for the FTDI Embedded Video Engine (EVE)
1474	+	//
1475	+	#if ENABLED(TOUCH_UI_FTDI_EVE)
1476	+	// Display board used
1477	+	//#define LCD_FTDI_VM800B35A // FTDI 3.5" with FT800 (320x240)
1478	+	//#define LCD_4DSYSTEMS_4DLCD_FT843 // 4D Systems 4.3" (480x272)
1479	+	//#define LCD_HAOYU_FT800CB // Haoyu with 4.3" or 5" (480x272)
1480	+	//#define LCD_HAOYU_FT810CB // Haoyu with 5" (800x480)
1481	+	//#define LCD_ALEPHOBJECTS_CLCD_UI // Aleph Objects Color LCD UI
1482	+	//#define LCD_FYSETC_TFT81050 // FYSETC with 5" (800x480)
1483	+
1484	+	// Correct the resolution if not using the stock TFT panel.
1485	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_320x240
1486	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_480x272
1487	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_800x480
1488	+
1489	+	// Mappings for boards with a standard RepRapDiscount Display connector
1490	+	//#define AO_EXP1_PINMAP // AlephObjects CLCD UI EXP1 mapping
1491	+	//#define AO_EXP2_PINMAP // AlephObjects CLCD UI EXP2 mapping
1492	+	//#define CR10_TFT_PINMAP // Rudolph Riedel's CR10 pin mapping
1493	+	//#define S6_TFT_PINMAP // FYSETC S6 pin mapping
1494	+	//#define F6_TFT_PINMAP // FYSETC F6 pin mapping
1495	+
1496	+	//#define OTHER_PIN_LAYOUT // Define pins manually below
1497	+	#if ENABLED(OTHER_PIN_LAYOUT)
1498	+	// Pins for CS and MOD_RESET (PD) must be chosen
1499	+	#define CLCD_MOD_RESET 9
1500	+	#define CLCD_SPI_CS 10
1501	+
1502	+	// If using software SPI, specify pins for SCLK, MOSI, MISO
1503	+	//#define CLCD_USE_SOFT_SPI
1504	+	#if ENABLED(CLCD_USE_SOFT_SPI)
1505	+	#define CLCD_SOFT_SPI_MOSI 11
1506	+	#define CLCD_SOFT_SPI_MISO 12
1507	+	#define CLCD_SOFT_SPI_SCLK 13
1508	+	#endif
1509	+	#endif
1510	+
1511	+	// Display Orientation. An inverted (i.e. upside-down) display
1512	+	// is supported on the FT800. The FT810 and beyond also support
1513	+	// portrait and mirrored orientations.
1514	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_INVERTED
1515	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_PORTRAIT
1516	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_MIRRORED
1517	+
1518	+	// UTF8 processing and rendering.
1519	+	// Unsupported characters are shown as '?'.
1520	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_USE_UTF8
1521	+	#if ENABLED(TOUCH_UI_USE_UTF8)
1522	+	// Western accents support. These accented characters use
1523	+	// combined bitmaps and require relatively little storage.
1524	+	#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_WESTERN_CHARSET
1525	+	#if ENABLED(TOUCH_UI_UTF8_WESTERN_CHARSET)
1526	+	// Additional character groups. These characters require
1527	+	// full bitmaps and take up considerable storage:
1528	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_SUPERSCRIPTS // ¹ ² ³
1529	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_COPYRIGHT // © ®
1530	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_GERMANIC // ß
1531	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_SCANDINAVIAN // Æ Ð Ø Þ æ ð ø þ
1532	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_PUNCTUATION // « » ¿ ¡
1533	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_CURRENCY // ¢ £ ¤ ¥
1534	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_ORDINALS // º ª
1535	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_MATHEMATICS // ± × ÷
1536	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_FRACTIONS // ¼ ½ ¾
1537	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_UTF8_SYMBOLS // µ ¶ ¦ § ¬
1538	+	#endif
1539	+	#endif
1540	+
1541	+	// Use a smaller font when labels don't fit buttons
1542	+	#define TOUCH_UI_FIT_TEXT
1543	+
1544	+	// Allow language selection from menu at run-time (otherwise use LCD_LANGUAGE)
1545	+	//#define LCD_LANGUAGE_1 en
1546	+	//#define LCD_LANGUAGE_2 fr
1547	+	//#define LCD_LANGUAGE_3 de
1548	+	//#define LCD_LANGUAGE_4 es
1549	+	//#define LCD_LANGUAGE_5 it
1550	+
1551	+	// Use a numeric passcode for "Screen lock" keypad.
1552	+	// (recommended for smaller displays)
1553	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_PASSCODE
1554	+
1555	+	// Output extra debug info for Touch UI events
1556	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_DEBUG
1557	+
1558	+	// Developer menu (accessed by touching "About Printer" copyright text)
1559	+	//#define TOUCH_UI_DEVELOPER_MENU
1560	+	#endif
1561	+
1562	+	//
1563	+	// Classic UI Options
1564	+	//
1565	+	#if TFT_SCALED_DOGLCD
1566	+	//#define TFT_MARLINUI_COLOR 0xFFFF // White
1567	+	//#define TFT_MARLINBG_COLOR 0x0000 // Black
1568	+	//#define TFT_DISABLED_COLOR 0x0003 // Almost black
1569	+	//#define TFT_BTCANCEL_COLOR 0xF800 // Red
1570	+	//#define TFT_BTARROWS_COLOR 0xDEE6 // 11011 110111 00110 Yellow
1571	+	//#define TFT_BTOKMENU_COLOR 0x145F // 00010 100010 11111 Cyan
1572	+	#endif
1573	+
1574	+	//
1575	+	// ADC Button Debounce
1576	+	//
1577	+	#if HAS_ADC_BUTTONS
1578	+	#define ADC_BUTTON_DEBOUNCE_DELAY 16 // Increase if buttons bounce or repeat too fast
1579	+	#endif
1580	+
1581	+	// @section safety
1582	+
1583	+	/**
1584	+	* The watchdog hardware timer will do a reset and disable all outputs
1585	+	* if the firmware gets too overloaded to read the temperature sensors.
1586	+	*
1587	+	* If you find that watchdog reboot causes your AVR board to hang forever,
1588	+	* enable WATCHDOG_RESET_MANUAL to use a custom timer instead of WDTO.
1589	+	* NOTE: This method is less reliable as it can only catch hangups while
1590	+	* interrupts are enabled.
1591	+	*/
1592	+	#define USE_WATCHDOG
1593	+	#if ENABLED(USE_WATCHDOG)
1594	+	//#define WATCHDOG_RESET_MANUAL
1595	+	#endif
1596	+
1597	+	// @section lcd
1598	+
1599	+	/**
1600	+	* Babystepping enables movement of the axes by tiny increments without changing
1601	+	* the current position values. This feature is used primarily to adjust the Z
1602	+	* axis in the first layer of a print in real-time.
1603	+	*
1604	+	* Warning: Does not respect endstops!
1605	+	*/
1606	+	#define BABYSTEPPING
1607	+	#if ENABLED(BABYSTEPPING)
1608	+	//#define INTEGRATED_BABYSTEPPING // EXPERIMENTAL integration of babystepping into the Stepper ISR
1609	+	//#define BABYSTEP_WITHOUT_HOMING
1610	+	//#define BABYSTEP_ALWAYS_AVAILABLE // Allow babystepping at all times (not just during movement).
1611	+	//#define BABYSTEP_XY // Also enable X/Y Babystepping. Not supported on DELTA!
1612	+	#define BABYSTEP_INVERT_Z false // Change if Z babysteps should go the other way
1613	+	//#define BABYSTEP_MILLIMETER_UNITS // Specify BABYSTEP_MULTIPLICATOR_(XY\|Z) in mm instead of micro-steps
1614	+	#define BABYSTEP_MULTIPLICATOR_Z 10 // (steps or mm) Steps or millimeter distance for each Z babystep
1615	+	#define BABYSTEP_MULTIPLICATOR_XY 10 // (steps or mm) Steps or millimeter distance for each XY babystep
1616	+
1617	+	#define DOUBLECLICK_FOR_Z_BABYSTEPPING // Double-click on the Status Screen for Z Babystepping.
1618	+	#if ENABLED(DOUBLECLICK_FOR_Z_BABYSTEPPING)
1619	+	#define DOUBLECLICK_MAX_INTERVAL 1250 // Maximum interval between clicks, in milliseconds.
1620	+	// Note: Extra time may be added to mitigate controller latency.
1621	+	//#define MOVE_Z_WHEN_IDLE // Jump to the move Z menu on doubleclick when printer is idle.
1622	+	#if ENABLED(MOVE_Z_WHEN_IDLE)
1623	+	#define MOVE_Z_IDLE_MULTIPLICATOR 1 // Multiply 1mm by this factor for the move step size.
1624	+	#endif
1625	+	#endif
1626	+
1627	+	//#define BABYSTEP_DISPLAY_TOTAL // Display total babysteps since last G28
1628	+
1629	+	#define BABYSTEP_ZPROBE_OFFSET // Combine M851 Z and Babystepping
1630	+	#if ENABLED(BABYSTEP_ZPROBE_OFFSET)
1631	+	//#define BABYSTEP_HOTEND_Z_OFFSET // For multiple hotends, babystep relative Z offsets
1632	+	//#define BABYSTEP_ZPROBE_GFX_OVERLAY // Enable graphical overlay on Z-offset editor
1633	+	#endif
1634	+	#endif
1635	+
1636	+	// @section extruder
1637	+
1638	+	/**
1639	+	* Linear Pressure Control v1.5
1640	+	*
1641	+	* Assumption: advance [steps] = k * (delta velocity [steps/s])
1642	+	* K=0 means advance disabled.
1643	+	*
1644	+	* NOTE: K values for LIN_ADVANCE 1.5 differ from earlier versions!
1645	+	*
1646	+	* Set K around 0.22 for 3mm PLA Direct Drive with ~6.5cm between the drive gear and heatbreak.
1647	+	* Larger K values will be needed for flexible filament and greater distances.
1648	+	* If this algorithm produces a higher speed offset than the extruder can handle (compared to E jerk)
1649	+	* print acceleration will be reduced during the affected moves to keep within the limit.
1650	+	*
1651	+	* See https://marlinfw.org/docs/features/lin_advance.html for full instructions.
1652	+	*/
1653	+	//#define LIN_ADVANCE
1654	+	#if ENABLED(LIN_ADVANCE)
1655	+	//#define EXTRA_LIN_ADVANCE_K // Enable for second linear advance constants
1656	+	#define LIN_ADVANCE_K 0.22 // Unit: mm compression per 1mm/s extruder speed
1657	+	//#define LA_DEBUG // If enabled, this will generate debug information output over USB.
1658	+	//#define EXPERIMENTAL_SCURVE // Enable this option to permit S-Curve Acceleration
1659	+	#endif
1660	+
1661	+	// @section leveling
1662	+
1663	+	/**
1664	+	* Points to probe for all 3-point Leveling procedures.
1665	+	* Override if the automatically selected points are inadequate.
1666	+	*/
1667	+	#if EITHER(AUTO_BED_LEVELING_3POINT, AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL)
1668	+	//#define PROBE_PT_1_X 15
1669	+	//#define PROBE_PT_1_Y 180
1670	+	//#define PROBE_PT_2_X 15
1671	+	//#define PROBE_PT_2_Y 20
1672	+	//#define PROBE_PT_3_X 170
1673	+	//#define PROBE_PT_3_Y 20
1674	+	#endif
1675	+
1676	+	/**
1677	+	* Probing Margins
1678	+	*
1679	+	* Override PROBING_MARGIN for each side of the build plate
1680	+	* Useful to get probe points to exact positions on targets or
1681	+	* to allow leveling to avoid plate clamps on only specific
1682	+	* sides of the bed. With NOZZLE_AS_PROBE negative values are
1683	+	* allowed, to permit probing outside the bed.
1684	+	*
1685	+	* If you are replacing the prior *_PROBE_BED_POSITION options,
1686	+	* LEFT and FRONT values in most cases will map directly over
1687	+	* RIGHT and REAR would be the inverse such as
1688	+	* (X/Y_BED_SIZE - RIGHT/BACK_PROBE_BED_POSITION)
1689	+	*
1690	+	* This will allow all positions to match at compilation, however
1691	+	* should the probe position be modified with M851XY then the
1692	+	* probe points will follow. This prevents any change from causing
1693	+	* the probe to be unable to reach any points.
1694	+	*/
1695	+	#if PROBE_SELECTED && !IS_KINEMATIC
1696	+	//#define PROBING_MARGIN_LEFT PROBING_MARGIN
1697	+	//#define PROBING_MARGIN_RIGHT PROBING_MARGIN
1698	+	//#define PROBING_MARGIN_FRONT PROBING_MARGIN
1699	+	//#define PROBING_MARGIN_BACK PROBING_MARGIN
1700	+	#endif
1701	+
1702	+	#if EITHER(MESH_BED_LEVELING, AUTO_BED_LEVELING_UBL)
1703	+	// Override the mesh area if the automatic (max) area is too large
1704	+	//#define MESH_MIN_X MESH_INSET
1705	+	//#define MESH_MIN_Y MESH_INSET
1706	+	//#define MESH_MAX_X X_BED_SIZE - (MESH_INSET)
1707	+	//#define MESH_MAX_Y Y_BED_SIZE - (MESH_INSET)
1708	+	#endif
1709	+
1710	+	/**
1711	+	* Repeatedly attempt G29 leveling until it succeeds.
1712	+	* Stop after G29_MAX_RETRIES attempts.
1713	+	*/
1714	+	//#define G29_RETRY_AND_RECOVER
1715	+	#if ENABLED(G29_RETRY_AND_RECOVER)
1716	+	#define G29_MAX_RETRIES 3
1717	+	#define G29_HALT_ON_FAILURE
1718	+	/**
1719	+	* Specify the GCODE commands that will be executed when leveling succeeds,
1720	+	* between attempts, and after the maximum number of retries have been tried.
1721	+	*/
1722	+	#define G29_SUCCESS_COMMANDS "M117 Bed leveling done."
1723	+	#define G29_RECOVER_COMMANDS "M117 Probe failed. Rewiping.\nG28\nG12 P0 S12 T0"
1724	+	#define G29_FAILURE_COMMANDS "M117 Bed leveling failed.\nG0 Z10\nM300 P25 S880\nM300 P50 S0\nM300 P25 S880\nM300 P50 S0\nM300 P25 S880\nM300 P50 S0\nG4 S1"
1725	+
1726	+	#endif
1727	+
1728	+	/**
1729	+	* Thermal Probe Compensation
1730	+	* Probe measurements are adjusted to compensate for temperature distortion.
1731	+	* Use G76 to calibrate this feature. Use M871 to set values manually.
1732	+	* For a more detailed explanation of the process see G76_M871.cpp.
1733	+	*/
1734	+	#if HAS_BED_PROBE && TEMP_SENSOR_PROBE && TEMP_SENSOR_BED
1735	+	// Enable thermal first layer compensation using bed and probe temperatures
1736	+	#define PROBE_TEMP_COMPENSATION
1737	+
1738	+	// Add additional compensation depending on hotend temperature
1739	+	// Note: this values cannot be calibrated and have to be set manually
1740	+	#if ENABLED(PROBE_TEMP_COMPENSATION)
1741	+	// Park position to wait for probe cooldown
1742	+	#define PTC_PARK_POS { 0, 0, 100 }
1743	+
1744	+	// Probe position to probe and wait for probe to reach target temperature
1745	+	#define PTC_PROBE_POS { 90, 100 }
1746	+
1747	+	// Enable additional compensation using hotend temperature
1748	+	// Note: this values cannot be calibrated automatically but have to be set manually
1749	+	//#define USE_TEMP_EXT_COMPENSATION
1750	+
1751	+	// Probe temperature calibration generates a table of values starting at PTC_SAMPLE_START
1752	+	// (e.g. 30), in steps of PTC_SAMPLE_RES (e.g. 5) with PTC_SAMPLE_COUNT (e.g. 10) samples.
1753	+
1754	+	//#define PTC_SAMPLE_START 30.0f
1755	+	//#define PTC_SAMPLE_RES 5.0f
1756	+	//#define PTC_SAMPLE_COUNT 10U
1757	+
1758	+	// Bed temperature calibration builds a similar table.
1759	+
1760	+	//#define BTC_SAMPLE_START 60.0f
1761	+	//#define BTC_SAMPLE_RES 5.0f
1762	+	//#define BTC_SAMPLE_COUNT 10U
1763	+
1764	+	// The temperature the probe should be at while taking measurements during bed temperature
1765	+	// calibration.
1766	+	//#define BTC_PROBE_TEMP 30.0f
1767	+
1768	+	// Height above Z=0.0f to raise the nozzle. Lowering this can help the probe to heat faster.
1769	+	// Note: the Z=0.0f offset is determined by the probe offset which can be set using M851.
1770	+	//#define PTC_PROBE_HEATING_OFFSET 0.5f
1771	+
1772	+	// Height to raise the Z-probe between heating and taking the next measurement. Some probes
1773	+	// may fail to untrigger if they have been triggered for a long time, which can be solved by
1774	+	// increasing the height the probe is raised to.
1775	+	//#define PTC_PROBE_RAISE 15U
1776	+
1777	+	// If the probe is outside of the defined range, use linear extrapolation using the closest
1778	+	// point and the PTC_LINEAR_EXTRAPOLATION'th next point. E.g. if set to 4 it will use data[0]
1779	+	// and data[4] to perform linear extrapolation for values below PTC_SAMPLE_START.
1780	+	//#define PTC_LINEAR_EXTRAPOLATION 4
1781	+	#endif
1782	+	#endif
1783	+
1784	+	// @section extras
1785	+
1786	+	//
1787	+	// G60/G61 Position Save and Return
1788	+	//
1789	+	//#define SAVED_POSITIONS 1 // Each saved position slot costs 12 bytes
1790	+
1791	+	//
1792	+	// G2/G3 Arc Support
1793	+	//
1794	+	#define ARC_SUPPORT // Disable this feature to save ~3226 bytes
1795	+	#if ENABLED(ARC_SUPPORT)
1796	+	#define MM_PER_ARC_SEGMENT 1 // (mm) Length (or minimum length) of each arc segment
1797	+	//#define ARC_SEGMENTS_PER_R 1 // Max segment length, MM_PER = Min
1798	+	#define MIN_ARC_SEGMENTS 24 // Minimum number of segments in a complete circle
1799	+	//#define ARC_SEGMENTS_PER_SEC 50 // Use feedrate to choose segment length (with MM_PER_ARC_SEGMENT as the minimum)
1800	+	#define N_ARC_CORRECTION 25 // Number of interpolated segments between corrections
1801	+	//#define ARC_P_CIRCLES // Enable the 'P' parameter to specify complete circles
1802	+	//#define CNC_WORKSPACE_PLANES // Allow G2/G3 to operate in XY, ZX, or YZ planes
1803	+	//#define SF_ARC_FIX // Enable only if using SkeinForge with "Arc Point" fillet procedure
1804	+	#endif
1805	+
1806	+	// Support for G5 with XYZE destination and IJPQ offsets. Requires ~2666 bytes.
1807	+	//#define BEZIER_CURVE_SUPPORT
1808	+
1809	+	/**
1810	+	* Direct Stepping
1811	+	*
1812	+	* Comparable to the method used by Klipper, G6 direct stepping significantly
1813	+	* reduces motion calculations, increases top printing speeds, and results in
1814	+	* less step aliasing by calculating all motions in advance.
1815	+	* Preparing your G-code: https://github.com/colinrgodsey/step-daemon
1816	+	*/
1817	+	//#define DIRECT_STEPPING
1818	+
1819	+	/**
1820	+	* G38 Probe Target
1821	+	*
1822	+	* This option adds G38.2 and G38.3 (probe towards target)
1823	+	* and optionally G38.4 and G38.5 (probe away from target).
1824	+	* Set MULTIPLE_PROBING for G38 to probe more than once.
1825	+	*/
1826	+	//#define G38_PROBE_TARGET
1827	+	#if ENABLED(G38_PROBE_TARGET)
1828	+	//#define G38_PROBE_AWAY // Include G38.4 and G38.5 to probe away from target
1829	+	#define G38_MINIMUM_MOVE 0.0275 // (mm) Minimum distance that will produce a move.
1830	+	#endif
1831	+
1832	+	// Moves (or segments) with fewer steps than this will be joined with the next move
1833	+	#define MIN_STEPS_PER_SEGMENT 6
1834	+
1835	+	/**
1836	+	* Minimum delay before and after setting the stepper DIR (in ns)
1837	+	* 0 : No delay (Expect at least 10µS since one Stepper ISR must transpire)
1838	+	* 20 : Minimum for TMC2xxx drivers
1839	+	* 200 : Minimum for A4988 drivers
1840	+	* 400 : Minimum for A5984 drivers
1841	+	* 500 : Minimum for LV8729 drivers (guess, no info in datasheet)
1842	+	* 650 : Minimum for DRV8825 drivers
1843	+	* 1500 : Minimum for TB6600 drivers (guess, no info in datasheet)
1844	+	* 15000 : Minimum for TB6560 drivers (guess, no info in datasheet)
1845	+	*
1846	+	* Override the default value based on the driver type set in Configuration.h.
1847	+	*/
1848	+	//#define MINIMUM_STEPPER_POST_DIR_DELAY 650
1849	+	//#define MINIMUM_STEPPER_PRE_DIR_DELAY 650
1850	+
1851	+	/**
1852	+	* Minimum stepper driver pulse width (in µs)
1853	+	* 0 : Smallest possible width the MCU can produce, compatible with TMC2xxx drivers
1854	+	* 0 : Minimum 500ns for LV8729, adjusted in stepper.h
1855	+	* 1 : Minimum for A4988 and A5984 stepper drivers
1856	+	* 2 : Minimum for DRV8825 stepper drivers
1857	+	* 3 : Minimum for TB6600 stepper drivers
1858	+	* 30 : Minimum for TB6560 stepper drivers
1859	+	*
1860	+	* Override the default value based on the driver type set in Configuration.h.
1861	+	*/
1862	+	//#define MINIMUM_STEPPER_PULSE 2
1863	+
1864	+	/**
1865	+	* Maximum stepping rate (in Hz) the stepper driver allows
1866	+	* If undefined, defaults to 1MHz / (2 * MINIMUM_STEPPER_PULSE)
1867	+	* 5000000 : Maximum for TMC2xxx stepper drivers
1868	+	* 1000000 : Maximum for LV8729 stepper driver
1869	+	* 500000 : Maximum for A4988 stepper driver
1870	+	* 250000 : Maximum for DRV8825 stepper driver
1871	+	* 150000 : Maximum for TB6600 stepper driver
1872	+	* 15000 : Maximum for TB6560 stepper driver
1873	+	*
1874	+	* Override the default value based on the driver type set in Configuration.h.
1875	+	*/
1876	+	//#define MAXIMUM_STEPPER_RATE 250000
1877	+
1878	+	// @section temperature
1879	+
1880	+	// Control heater 0 and heater 1 in parallel.
1881	+	//#define HEATERS_PARALLEL
1882	+
1883	+	//===========================================================================
1884	+	//================================= Buffers =================================
1885	+	//===========================================================================
1886	+
1887	+	// @section motion
1888	+
1889	+	// The number of linear moves that can be in the planner at once.
1890	+	// The value of BLOCK_BUFFER_SIZE must be a power of 2 (e.g. 8, 16, 32)
1891	+	#if BOTH(SDSUPPORT, DIRECT_STEPPING)
1892	+	#define BLOCK_BUFFER_SIZE 8
1893	+	#elif ENABLED(SDSUPPORT)
1894	+	#define BLOCK_BUFFER_SIZE 16
1895	+	#else
1896	+	#define BLOCK_BUFFER_SIZE 16
1897	+	#endif
1898	+
1899	+	// @section serial
1900	+
1901	+	// The ASCII buffer for serial input
1902	+	#define MAX_CMD_SIZE 96
1903	+	#define BUFSIZE 4
1904	+
1905	+	// Transmission to Host Buffer Size
1906	+	// To save 386 bytes of PROGMEM (and TX_BUFFER_SIZE+3 bytes of RAM) set to 0.
1907	+	// To buffer a simple "ok" you need 4 bytes.
1908	+	// For ADVANCED_OK (M105) you need 32 bytes.
1909	+	// For debug-echo: 128 bytes for the optimal speed.
1910	+	// Other output doesn't need to be that speedy.
1911	+	// :[0, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256]
1912	+	#define TX_BUFFER_SIZE 0
1913	+
1914	+	// Host Receive Buffer Size
1915	+	// Without XON/XOFF flow control (see SERIAL_XON_XOFF below) 32 bytes should be enough.
1916	+	// To use flow control, set this buffer size to at least 1024 bytes.
1917	+	// :[0, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048]
1918	+	//#define RX_BUFFER_SIZE 1024
1919	+
1920	+	#if RX_BUFFER_SIZE >= 1024
1921	+	// Enable to have the controller send XON/XOFF control characters to
1922	+	// the host to signal the RX buffer is becoming full.
1923	+	//#define SERIAL_XON_XOFF
1924	+	#endif
1925	+
1926	+	// Add M575 G-code to change the baud rate
1927	+	//#define BAUD_RATE_GCODE
1928	+
1929	+	#if ENABLED(SDSUPPORT)
1930	+	// Enable this option to collect and display the maximum
1931	+	// RX queue usage after transferring a file to SD.
1932	+	//#define SERIAL_STATS_MAX_RX_QUEUED
1933	+
1934	+	// Enable this option to collect and display the number
1935	+	// of dropped bytes after a file transfer to SD.
1936	+	//#define SERIAL_STATS_DROPPED_RX
1937	+	#endif
1938	+
1939	+	/**
1940	+	* Emergency Command Parser
1941	+	*
1942	+	* Add a low-level parser to intercept certain commands as they
1943	+	* enter the serial receive buffer, so they cannot be blocked.
1944	+	* Currently handles M108, M112, M410, M876
1945	+	* NOTE: Not yet implemented for all platforms.
1946	+	*/
1947	+	//#define EMERGENCY_PARSER
1948	+
1949	+	// Bad Serial-connections can miss a received command by sending an 'ok'
1950	+	// Therefore some clients abort after 30 seconds in a timeout.
1951	+	// Some other clients start sending commands while receiving a 'wait'.
1952	+	// This "wait" is only sent when the buffer is empty. 1 second is a good value here.
1953	+	//#define NO_TIMEOUTS 1000 // Milliseconds
1954	+
1955	+	// Some clients will have this feature soon. This could make the NO_TIMEOUTS unnecessary.
1956	+	//#define ADVANCED_OK
1957	+
1958	+	// Printrun may have trouble receiving long strings all at once.
1959	+	// This option inserts short delays between lines of serial output.
1960	+	#define SERIAL_OVERRUN_PROTECTION
1961	+
1962	+	// For serial echo, the number of digits after the decimal point
1963	+	//#define SERIAL_FLOAT_PRECISION 4
1964	+
1965	+	// @section extras
1966	+
1967	+	/**
1968	+	* Extra Fan Speed
1969	+	* Adds a secondary fan speed for each print-cooling fan.
1970	+	* 'M106 P<fan> T3-255' : Set a secondary speed for <fan>
1971	+	* 'M106 P<fan> T2' : Use the set secondary speed
1972	+	* 'M106 P<fan> T1' : Restore the previous fan speed
1973	+	*/
1974	+	//#define EXTRA_FAN_SPEED
1975	+
1976	+	/**
1977	+	* Firmware-based and LCD-controlled retract
1978	+	*
1979	+	* Add G10 / G11 commands for automatic firmware-based retract / recover.
1980	+	* Use M207 and M208 to define parameters for retract / recover.
1981	+	*
1982	+	* Use M209 to enable or disable auto-retract.
1983	+	* With auto-retract enabled, all G1 E moves within the set range
1984	+	* will be converted to firmware-based retract/recover moves.
1985	+	*
1986	+	* Be sure to turn off auto-retract during filament change.
1987	+	*
1988	+	* Note that M207 / M208 / M209 settings are saved to EEPROM.
1989	+	*/
1990	+	//#define FWRETRACT
1991	+	#if ENABLED(FWRETRACT)
1992	+	#define FWRETRACT_AUTORETRACT // Override slicer retractions
1993	+	#if ENABLED(FWRETRACT_AUTORETRACT)
1994	+	#define MIN_AUTORETRACT 0.1 // (mm) Don't convert E moves under this length
1995	+	#define MAX_AUTORETRACT 10.0 // (mm) Don't convert E moves over this length
1996	+	#endif
1997	+	#define RETRACT_LENGTH 3 // (mm) Default retract length (positive value)
1998	+	#define RETRACT_LENGTH_SWAP 13 // (mm) Default swap retract length (positive value)
1999	+	#define RETRACT_FEEDRATE 45 // (mm/s) Default feedrate for retracting
2000	+	#define RETRACT_ZRAISE 0 // (mm) Default retract Z-raise
2001	+	#define RETRACT_RECOVER_LENGTH 0 // (mm) Default additional recover length (added to retract length on recover)
2002	+	#define RETRACT_RECOVER_LENGTH_SWAP 0 // (mm) Default additional swap recover length (added to retract length on recover from toolchange)
2003	+	#define RETRACT_RECOVER_FEEDRATE 8 // (mm/s) Default feedrate for recovering from retraction
2004	+	#define RETRACT_RECOVER_FEEDRATE_SWAP 8 // (mm/s) Default feedrate for recovering from swap retraction
2005	+	#if ENABLED(MIXING_EXTRUDER)
2006	+	//#define RETRACT_SYNC_MIXING // Retract and restore all mixing steppers simultaneously
2007	+	#endif
2008	+	#endif
2009	+
2010	+	/**
2011	+	* Universal tool change settings.
2012	+	* Applies to all types of extruders except where explicitly noted.
2013	+	*/
2014	+	#if HAS_MULTI_EXTRUDER
2015	+	// Z raise distance for tool-change, as needed for some extruders
2016	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_ZRAISE 2 // (mm)
2017	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_ZRAISE_BEFORE_RETRACT // Apply raise before swap retraction (if enabled)
2018	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_NO_RETURN // Never return to previous position on tool-change
2019	+	#if ENABLED(TOOLCHANGE_NO_RETURN)
2020	+	//#define EVENT_GCODE_AFTER_TOOLCHANGE "G12X" // Extra G-code to run after tool-change
2021	+	#endif
2022	+
2023	+	/**
2024	+	* Retract and prime filament on tool-change to reduce
2025	+	* ooze and stringing and to get cleaner transitions.
2026	+	*/
2027	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_FILAMENT_SWAP
2028	+	#if ENABLED(TOOLCHANGE_FILAMENT_SWAP)
2029	+	// Load / Unload
2030	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_LENGTH 12 // (mm) Load / Unload length
2031	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_EXTRA_RESUME_LENGTH 0 // (mm) Extra length for better restart, fine tune by LCD/Gcode)
2032	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_RETRACT_SPEED (50*60) // (mm/min) (Unloading)
2033	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_UNRETRACT_SPEED (25*60) // (mm/min) (On SINGLENOZZLE or Bowden loading must be slowed down)
2034	+
2035	+	// Longer prime to clean out a SINGLENOZZLE
2036	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_EXTRA_PRIME 0 // (mm) Extra priming length
2037	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_PRIME_SPEED (4.6*60) // (mm/min) Extra priming feedrate
2038	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_WIPE_RETRACT 0 // (mm/min) Retract before cooling for less stringing, better wipe, etc.
2039	+
2040	+	// Cool after prime to reduce stringing
2041	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_FAN -1 // Fan index or -1 to skip
2042	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_FAN_SPEED 255 // 0-255
2043	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_FAN_TIME 10 // (seconds)
2044	+
2045	+	// Swap uninitialized extruder with TOOLCHANGE_FS_PRIME_SPEED for all lengths (recover + prime)
2046	+	// (May break filament if not retracted beforehand.)
2047	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_INIT_BEFORE_SWAP
2048	+
2049	+	// Prime on the first T0 (If other, TOOLCHANGE_FS_INIT_BEFORE_SWAP applied)
2050	+	// Enable it (M217 V[0/1]) before printing, to avoid unwanted priming on host connect
2051	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_FS_PRIME_FIRST_USED
2052	+
2053	+	/**
2054	+	* Tool Change Migration
2055	+	* This feature provides G-code and LCD options to switch tools mid-print.
2056	+	* All applicable tool properties are migrated so the print can continue.
2057	+	* Tools must be closely matching and other restrictions may apply.
2058	+	* Useful to:
2059	+	* - Change filament color without interruption
2060	+	* - Switch spools automatically on filament runout
2061	+	* - Switch to a different nozzle on an extruder jam
2062	+	*/
2063	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_MIGRATION_FEATURE
2064	+
2065	+	#endif
2066	+
2067	+	/**
2068	+	* Position to park head during tool change.
2069	+	* Doesn't apply to SWITCHING_TOOLHEAD, DUAL_X_CARRIAGE, or PARKING_EXTRUDER
2070	+	*/
2071	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_PARK
2072	+	#if ENABLED(TOOLCHANGE_PARK)
2073	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_PARK_XY { X_MIN_POS + 10, Y_MIN_POS + 10 }
2074	+	#define TOOLCHANGE_PARK_XY_FEEDRATE 6000 // (mm/min)
2075	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_PARK_X_ONLY // X axis only move
2076	+	//#define TOOLCHANGE_PARK_Y_ONLY // Y axis only move
2077	+	#endif
2078	+	#endif // HAS_MULTI_EXTRUDER
2079	+
2080	+	/**
2081	+	* Advanced Pause
2082	+	* Experimental feature for filament change support and for parking the nozzle when paused.
2083	+	* Adds the GCode M600 for initiating filament change.
2084	+	* If PARK_HEAD_ON_PAUSE enabled, adds the GCode M125 to pause printing and park the nozzle.
2085	+	*
2086	+	* Requires an LCD display.
2087	+	* Requires NOZZLE_PARK_FEATURE.
2088	+	* This feature is required for the default FILAMENT_RUNOUT_SCRIPT.
2089	+	*/
2090	+	//#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_FEATURE
2091	+	#if ENABLED(ADVANCED_PAUSE_FEATURE)
2092	+	#define PAUSE_PARK_RETRACT_FEEDRATE 60 // (mm/s) Initial retract feedrate.
2093	+	#define PAUSE_PARK_RETRACT_LENGTH 2 // (mm) Initial retract.
2094	+	// This short retract is done immediately, before parking the nozzle.
2095	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_UNLOAD_FEEDRATE 10 // (mm/s) Unload filament feedrate. This can be pretty fast.
2096	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_UNLOAD_ACCEL 25 // (mm/s^2) Lower acceleration may allow a faster feedrate.
2097	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_UNLOAD_LENGTH 100 // (mm) The length of filament for a complete unload.
2098	+	// For Bowden, the full length of the tube and nozzle.
2099	+	// For direct drive, the full length of the nozzle.
2100	+	// Set to 0 for manual unloading.
2101	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_SLOW_LOAD_FEEDRATE 6 // (mm/s) Slow move when starting load.
2102	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_SLOW_LOAD_LENGTH 0 // (mm) Slow length, to allow time to insert material.
2103	+	// 0 to disable start loading and skip to fast load only
2104	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_FAST_LOAD_FEEDRATE 6 // (mm/s) Load filament feedrate. This can be pretty fast.
2105	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_FAST_LOAD_ACCEL 25 // (mm/s^2) Lower acceleration may allow a faster feedrate.
2106	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_FAST_LOAD_LENGTH 0 // (mm) Load length of filament, from extruder gear to nozzle.
2107	+	// For Bowden, the full length of the tube and nozzle.
2108	+	// For direct drive, the full length of the nozzle.
2109	+	//#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_CONTINUOUS_PURGE // Purge continuously up to the purge length until interrupted.
2110	+	#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_PURGE_FEEDRATE 3 // (mm/s) Extrude feedrate (after loading). Should be slower than load feedrate.
2111	+	#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_PURGE_LENGTH 50 // (mm) Length to extrude after loading.
2112	+	// Set to 0 for manual extrusion.
2113	+	// Filament can be extruded repeatedly from the Filament Change menu
2114	+	// until extrusion is consistent, and to purge old filament.
2115	+	#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_RESUME_PRIME 0 // (mm) Extra distance to prime nozzle after returning from park.
2116	+	//#define ADVANCED_PAUSE_FANS_PAUSE // Turn off print-cooling fans while the machine is paused.
2117	+
2118	+	// Filament Unload does a Retract, Delay, and Purge first:
2119	+	#define FILAMENT_UNLOAD_PURGE_RETRACT 13 // (mm) Unload initial retract length.
2120	+	#define FILAMENT_UNLOAD_PURGE_DELAY 5000 // (ms) Delay for the filament to cool after retract.
2121	+	#define FILAMENT_UNLOAD_PURGE_LENGTH 8 // (mm) An unretract is done, then this length is purged.
2122	+	#define FILAMENT_UNLOAD_PURGE_FEEDRATE 25 // (mm/s) feedrate to purge before unload
2123	+
2124	+	#define PAUSE_PARK_NOZZLE_TIMEOUT 45 // (seconds) Time limit before the nozzle is turned off for safety.
2125	+	#define FILAMENT_CHANGE_ALERT_BEEPS 10 // Number of alert beeps to play when a response is needed.
2126	+	#define PAUSE_PARK_NO_STEPPER_TIMEOUT // Enable for XYZ steppers to stay powered on during filament change.
2127	+
2128	+	//#define PARK_HEAD_ON_PAUSE // Park the nozzle during pause and filament change.
2129	+	//#define HOME_BEFORE_FILAMENT_CHANGE // If needed, home before parking for filament change
2130	+
2131	+	//#define FILAMENT_LOAD_UNLOAD_GCODES // Add M701/M702 Load/Unload G-codes, plus Load/Unload in the LCD Prepare menu.
2132	+	//#define FILAMENT_UNLOAD_ALL_EXTRUDERS // Allow M702 to unload all extruders above a minimum target temp (as set by M302)
2133	+	#endif
2134	+
2135	+	// @section tmc
2136	+
2137	+	/**
2138	+	* TMC26X Stepper Driver options
2139	+	*
2140	+	* The TMC26XStepper library is required for this stepper driver.
2141	+	* https://github.com/trinamic/TMC26XStepper
2142	+	*/
2143	+	#if HAS_DRIVER(TMC26X)
2144	+
2145	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_X(TMC26X)
2146	+	#define X_MAX_CURRENT 1000 // (mA)
2147	+	#define X_SENSE_RESISTOR 91 // (mOhms)
2148	+	#define X_MICROSTEPS 16 // Number of microsteps
2149	+	#endif
2150	+
2151	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_X2(TMC26X)
2152	+	#define X2_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2153	+	#define X2_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2154	+	#define X2_MICROSTEPS 16
2155	+	#endif
2156	+
2157	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Y(TMC26X)
2158	+	#define Y_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2159	+	#define Y_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2160	+	#define Y_MICROSTEPS 16
2161	+	#endif
2162	+
2163	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Y2(TMC26X)
2164	+	#define Y2_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2165	+	#define Y2_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2166	+	#define Y2_MICROSTEPS 16
2167	+	#endif
2168	+
2169	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Z(TMC26X)
2170	+	#define Z_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2171	+	#define Z_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2172	+	#define Z_MICROSTEPS 16
2173	+	#endif
2174	+
2175	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Z2(TMC26X)
2176	+	#define Z2_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2177	+	#define Z2_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2178	+	#define Z2_MICROSTEPS 16
2179	+	#endif
2180	+
2181	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Z3(TMC26X)
2182	+	#define Z3_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2183	+	#define Z3_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2184	+	#define Z3_MICROSTEPS 16
2185	+	#endif
2186	+
2187	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_Z4(TMC26X)
2188	+	#define Z4_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2189	+	#define Z4_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2190	+	#define Z4_MICROSTEPS 16
2191	+	#endif
2192	+
2193	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E0(TMC26X)
2194	+	#define E0_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2195	+	#define E0_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2196	+	#define E0_MICROSTEPS 16
2197	+	#endif
2198	+
2199	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E1(TMC26X)
2200	+	#define E1_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2201	+	#define E1_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2202	+	#define E1_MICROSTEPS 16
2203	+	#endif
2204	+
2205	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E2(TMC26X)
2206	+	#define E2_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2207	+	#define E2_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2208	+	#define E2_MICROSTEPS 16
2209	+	#endif
2210	+
2211	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E3(TMC26X)
2212	+	#define E3_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2213	+	#define E3_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2214	+	#define E3_MICROSTEPS 16
2215	+	#endif
2216	+
2217	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E4(TMC26X)
2218	+	#define E4_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2219	+	#define E4_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2220	+	#define E4_MICROSTEPS 16
2221	+	#endif
2222	+
2223	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E5(TMC26X)
2224	+	#define E5_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2225	+	#define E5_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2226	+	#define E5_MICROSTEPS 16
2227	+	#endif
2228	+
2229	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E6(TMC26X)
2230	+	#define E6_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2231	+	#define E6_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2232	+	#define E6_MICROSTEPS 16
2233	+	#endif
2234	+
2235	+	#if AXIS_DRIVER_TYPE_E7(TMC26X)
2236	+	#define E7_MAX_CURRENT 1000
2237	+	#define E7_SENSE_RESISTOR 91
2238	+	#define E7_MICROSTEPS 16
2239	+	#endif
2240	+
2241	+	#endif // TMC26X
2242	+
2243	+	// @section tmc_smart
2244	+
2245	+	/**
2246	+	* To use TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2660, TMC5130, TMC5160 stepper drivers in SPI mode
2247	+	* connect your SPI pins to the hardware SPI interface on your board and define
2248	+	* the required CS pins in your `pins_MYBOARD.h` file. (e.g., RAMPS 1.4 uses AUX3
2249	+	* pins `X_CS_PIN 53`, `Y_CS_PIN 49`, etc.).
2250	+	* You may also use software SPI if you wish to use general purpose IO pins.
2251	+	*
2252	+	* To use TMC2208 stepper UART-configurable stepper drivers connect #_SERIAL_TX_PIN
2253	+	* to the driver side PDN_UART pin with a 1K resistor.
2254	+	* To use the reading capabilities, also connect #_SERIAL_RX_PIN to PDN_UART without
2255	+	* a resistor.
2256	+	* The drivers can also be used with hardware serial.
2257	+	*
2258	+	* TMCStepper library is required to use TMC stepper drivers.
2259	+	* https://github.com/teemuatlut/TMCStepper
2260	+	*/
2261	+	#if HAS_TRINAMIC_CONFIG
2262	+
2263	+	#define HOLD_MULTIPLIER 0.5 // Scales down the holding current from run current
2264	+	#define INTERPOLATE true // Interpolate X/Y/Z_MICROSTEPS to 256
2265	+
2266	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(X)
2267	+	#define X_CURRENT 800 // (mA) RMS current. Multiply by 1.414 for peak current.
2268	+	#define X_CURRENT_HOME X_CURRENT // (mA) RMS current for sensorless homing
2269	+	#define X_MICROSTEPS 16 // 0..256
2270	+	#define X_RSENSE 0.11
2271	+	#define X_CHAIN_POS -1 // <=0 : Not chained. 1 : MCU MOSI connected. 2 : Next in chain, ...
2272	+	#endif
2273	+
2274	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(X2)
2275	+	#define X2_CURRENT 800
2276	+	#define X2_CURRENT_HOME X2_CURRENT
2277	+	#define X2_MICROSTEPS 16
2278	+	#define X2_RSENSE 0.11
2279	+	#define X2_CHAIN_POS -1
2280	+	#endif
2281	+
2282	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Y)
2283	+	#define Y_CURRENT 800
2284	+	#define Y_CURRENT_HOME Y_CURRENT
2285	+	#define Y_MICROSTEPS 16
2286	+	#define Y_RSENSE 0.11
2287	+	#define Y_CHAIN_POS -1
2288	+	#endif
2289	+
2290	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Y2)
2291	+	#define Y2_CURRENT 800
2292	+	#define Y2_CURRENT_HOME Y2_CURRENT
2293	+	#define Y2_MICROSTEPS 16
2294	+	#define Y2_RSENSE 0.11
2295	+	#define Y2_CHAIN_POS -1
2296	+	#endif
2297	+
2298	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Z)
2299	+	#define Z_CURRENT 800
2300	+	#define Z_CURRENT_HOME Z_CURRENT
2301	+	#define Z_MICROSTEPS 16
2302	+	#define Z_RSENSE 0.11
2303	+	#define Z_CHAIN_POS -1
2304	+	#endif
2305	+
2306	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Z2)
2307	+	#define Z2_CURRENT 800
2308	+	#define Z2_CURRENT_HOME Z2_CURRENT
2309	+	#define Z2_MICROSTEPS 16
2310	+	#define Z2_RSENSE 0.11
2311	+	#define Z2_CHAIN_POS -1
2312	+	#endif
2313	+
2314	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Z3)
2315	+	#define Z3_CURRENT 800
2316	+	#define Z3_CURRENT_HOME Z3_CURRENT
2317	+	#define Z3_MICROSTEPS 16
2318	+	#define Z3_RSENSE 0.11
2319	+	#define Z3_CHAIN_POS -1
2320	+	#endif
2321	+
2322	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(Z4)
2323	+	#define Z4_CURRENT 800
2324	+	#define Z4_CURRENT_HOME Z4_CURRENT
2325	+	#define Z4_MICROSTEPS 16
2326	+	#define Z4_RSENSE 0.11
2327	+	#define Z4_CHAIN_POS -1
2328	+	#endif
2329	+
2330	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E0)
2331	+	#define E0_CURRENT 800
2332	+	#define E0_MICROSTEPS 16
2333	+	#define E0_RSENSE 0.11
2334	+	#define E0_CHAIN_POS -1
2335	+	#endif
2336	+
2337	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E1)
2338	+	#define E1_CURRENT 800
2339	+	#define E1_MICROSTEPS 16
2340	+	#define E1_RSENSE 0.11
2341	+	#define E1_CHAIN_POS -1
2342	+	#endif
2343	+
2344	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E2)
2345	+	#define E2_CURRENT 800
2346	+	#define E2_MICROSTEPS 16
2347	+	#define E2_RSENSE 0.11
2348	+	#define E2_CHAIN_POS -1
2349	+	#endif
2350	+
2351	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E3)
2352	+	#define E3_CURRENT 800
2353	+	#define E3_MICROSTEPS 16
2354	+	#define E3_RSENSE 0.11
2355	+	#define E3_CHAIN_POS -1
2356	+	#endif
2357	+
2358	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E4)
2359	+	#define E4_CURRENT 800
2360	+	#define E4_MICROSTEPS 16
2361	+	#define E4_RSENSE 0.11
2362	+	#define E4_CHAIN_POS -1
2363	+	#endif
2364	+
2365	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E5)
2366	+	#define E5_CURRENT 800
2367	+	#define E5_MICROSTEPS 16
2368	+	#define E5_RSENSE 0.11
2369	+	#define E5_CHAIN_POS -1
2370	+	#endif
2371	+
2372	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E6)
2373	+	#define E6_CURRENT 800
2374	+	#define E6_MICROSTEPS 16
2375	+	#define E6_RSENSE 0.11
2376	+	#define E6_CHAIN_POS -1
2377	+	#endif
2378	+
2379	+	#if AXIS_IS_TMC(E7)
2380	+	#define E7_CURRENT 800
2381	+	#define E7_MICROSTEPS 16
2382	+	#define E7_RSENSE 0.11
2383	+	#define E7_CHAIN_POS -1
2384	+	#endif
2385	+
2386	+	/**
2387	+	* Override default SPI pins for TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2660, TMC5130 and TMC5160 drivers here.
2388	+	* The default pins can be found in your board's pins file.
2389	+	*/
2390	+	//#define X_CS_PIN -1
2391	+	//#define Y_CS_PIN -1
2392	+	//#define Z_CS_PIN -1
2393	+	//#define X2_CS_PIN -1
2394	+	//#define Y2_CS_PIN -1
2395	+	//#define Z2_CS_PIN -1
2396	+	//#define Z3_CS_PIN -1
2397	+	//#define E0_CS_PIN -1
2398	+	//#define E1_CS_PIN -1
2399	+	//#define E2_CS_PIN -1
2400	+	//#define E3_CS_PIN -1
2401	+	//#define E4_CS_PIN -1
2402	+	//#define E5_CS_PIN -1
2403	+	//#define E6_CS_PIN -1
2404	+	//#define E7_CS_PIN -1
2405	+
2406	+	/**
2407	+	* Software option for SPI driven drivers (TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2660, TMC5130 and TMC5160).
2408	+	* The default SW SPI pins are defined the respective pins files,
2409	+	* but you can override or define them here.
2410	+	*/
2411	+	//#define TMC_USE_SW_SPI
2412	+	//#define TMC_SW_MOSI -1
2413	+	//#define TMC_SW_MISO -1
2414	+	//#define TMC_SW_SCK -1
2415	+
2416	+	/**
2417	+	* Four TMC2209 drivers can use the same HW/SW serial port with hardware configured addresses.
2418	+	* Set the address using jumpers on pins MS1 and MS2.
2419	+	* Address \| MS1 \| MS2
2420	+	* 0 \| LOW \| LOW
2421	+	* 1 \| HIGH \| LOW
2422	+	* 2 \| LOW \| HIGH
2423	+	* 3 \| HIGH \| HIGH
2424	+	*
2425	+	* Set _SERIAL_TX_PIN and _SERIAL_RX_PIN to match for all drivers
2426	+	* on the same serial port, either here or in your board's pins file.
2427	+	*/
2428	+	#define X_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2429	+	#define Y_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2430	+	#define Z_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2431	+	#define X2_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2432	+	#define Y2_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2433	+	#define Z2_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2434	+	#define Z3_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2435	+	#define Z4_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2436	+	#define E0_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2437	+	#define E1_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2438	+	#define E2_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2439	+	#define E3_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2440	+	#define E4_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2441	+	#define E5_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2442	+	#define E6_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2443	+	#define E7_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0
2444	+
2445	+	/**
2446	+	* Software enable
2447	+	*
2448	+	* Use for drivers that do not use a dedicated enable pin, but rather handle the same
2449	+	* function through a communication line such as SPI or UART.
2450	+	*/
2451	+	//#define SOFTWARE_DRIVER_ENABLE
2452	+
2453	+	/**
2454	+	* TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2208, TMC2209, TMC5130 and TMC5160 only
2455	+	* Use Trinamic's ultra quiet stepping mode.
2456	+	* When disabled, Marlin will use spreadCycle stepping mode.
2457	+	*/
2458	+	#define STEALTHCHOP_XY
2459	+	#define STEALTHCHOP_Z
2460	+	#define STEALTHCHOP_E
2461	+
2462	+	/**
2463	+	* Optimize spreadCycle chopper parameters by using predefined parameter sets
2464	+	* or with the help of an example included in the library.
2465	+	* Provided parameter sets are
2466	+	* CHOPPER_DEFAULT_12V
2467	+	* CHOPPER_DEFAULT_19V
2468	+	* CHOPPER_DEFAULT_24V
2469	+	* CHOPPER_DEFAULT_36V
2470	+	* CHOPPER_09STEP_24V // 0.9 degree steppers (24V)
2471	+	* CHOPPER_PRUSAMK3_24V // Imported parameters from the official Průša firmware for MK3 (24V)
2472	+	* CHOPPER_MARLIN_119 // Old defaults from Marlin v1.1.9
2473	+	*
2474	+	* Define you own with
2475	+	* { <off_time[1..15]>, <hysteresis_end[-3..12]>, hysteresis_start[1..8] }
2476	+	*/
2477	+	#define CHOPPER_TIMING CHOPPER_DEFAULT_24V
2478	+
2479	+	/**
2480	+	* Monitor Trinamic drivers
2481	+	* for error conditions like overtemperature and short to ground.
2482	+	* To manage over-temp Marlin can decrease the driver current until the error condition clears.
2483	+	* Other detected conditions can be used to stop the current print.
2484	+	* Relevant G-codes:
2485	+	* M906 - Set or get motor current in milliamps using axis codes X, Y, Z, E. Report values if no axis codes given.
2486	+	* M911 - Report stepper driver overtemperature pre-warn condition.
2487	+	* M912 - Clear stepper driver overtemperature pre-warn condition flag.
2488	+	* M122 - Report driver parameters (Requires TMC_DEBUG)
2489	+	*/
2490	+	//#define MONITOR_DRIVER_STATUS
2491	+
2492	+	#if ENABLED(MONITOR_DRIVER_STATUS)
2493	+	#define CURRENT_STEP_DOWN 50 // [mA]
2494	+	#define REPORT_CURRENT_CHANGE
2495	+	#define STOP_ON_ERROR
2496	+	#endif
2497	+
2498	+	/**
2499	+	* TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2208, TMC2209, TMC5130 and TMC5160 only
2500	+	* The driver will switch to spreadCycle when stepper speed is over HYBRID_THRESHOLD.
2501	+	* This mode allows for faster movements at the expense of higher noise levels.
2502	+	* STEALTHCHOP_(XY\|Z\|E) must be enabled to use HYBRID_THRESHOLD.
2503	+	* M913 X/Y/Z/E to live tune the setting
2504	+	*/
2505	+	//#define HYBRID_THRESHOLD
2506	+
2507	+	#define X_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 100 // [mm/s]
2508	+	#define X2_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 100
2509	+	#define Y_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 100
2510	+	#define Y2_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 100
2511	+	#define Z_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 3
2512	+	#define Z2_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 3
2513	+	#define Z3_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 3
2514	+	#define Z4_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 3
2515	+	#define E0_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2516	+	#define E1_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2517	+	#define E2_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2518	+	#define E3_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2519	+	#define E4_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2520	+	#define E5_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2521	+	#define E6_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2522	+	#define E7_HYBRID_THRESHOLD 30
2523	+
2524	+	/**
2525	+	* Use StallGuard to home / probe X, Y, Z.
2526	+	*
2527	+	* TMC2130, TMC2160, TMC2209, TMC2660, TMC5130, and TMC5160 only
2528	+	* Connect the stepper driver's DIAG1 pin to the X/Y endstop pin.
2529	+	* X, Y, and Z homing will always be done in spreadCycle mode.
2530	+	*
2531	+	* X/Y/Z_STALL_SENSITIVITY is the default stall threshold.
2532	+	* Use M914 X Y Z to set the stall threshold at runtime:
2533	+	*
2534	+	* Sensitivity TMC2209 Others
2535	+	* HIGHEST 255 -64 (Too sensitive => False positive)
2536	+	* LOWEST 0 63 (Too insensitive => No trigger)
2537	+	*
2538	+	* It is recommended to set HOMING_BUMP_MM to { 0, 0, 0 }.
2539	+	*
2540	+	* SPI_ENDSTOPS * Beta feature! * TMC2130 Only ***
2541	+	* Poll the driver through SPI to determine load when homing.
2542	+	* Removes the need for a wire from DIAG1 to an endstop pin.
2543	+	*
2544	+	* IMPROVE_HOMING_RELIABILITY tunes acceleration and jerk when
2545	+	* homing and adds a guard period for endstop triggering.
2546	+	*
2547	+	* Comment *_STALL_SENSITIVITY to disable sensorless homing for that axis.
2548	+	*/
2549	+	#define SENSORLESS_HOMING // StallGuard capable drivers only
2550	+
2551	+	#if EITHER(SENSORLESS_HOMING, SENSORLESS_PROBING)
2552	+	// TMC2209: 0...255. TMC2130: -64...63
2553	+	#define X_STALL_SENSITIVITY 8
2554	+	#define X2_STALL_SENSITIVITY X_STALL_SENSITIVITY
2555	+	#define Y_STALL_SENSITIVITY 8
2556	+	#define Y2_STALL_SENSITIVITY Y_STALL_SENSITIVITY
2557	+	//#define Z_STALL_SENSITIVITY 8
2558	+	//#define Z2_STALL_SENSITIVITY Z_STALL_SENSITIVITY
2559	+	//#define Z3_STALL_SENSITIVITY Z_STALL_SENSITIVITY
2560	+	//#define Z4_STALL_SENSITIVITY Z_STALL_SENSITIVITY
2561	+	//#define SPI_ENDSTOPS // TMC2130 only
2562	+	//#define IMPROVE_HOMING_RELIABILITY
2563	+	#endif
2564	+
2565	+	/**
2566	+	* TMC Homing stepper phase.
2567	+	*
2568	+	* Improve homing repeatability by homing to stepper coil's nearest absolute
2569	+	* phase position. Trinamic drivers use a stepper phase table with 1024 values
2570	+	* spanning 4 full steps with 256 positions each (ergo, 1024 positions).
2571	+	* Full step positions (128, 384, 640, 896) have the highest holding torque.
2572	+	*
2573	+	* Values from 0..1023, -1 to disable homing phase for that axis.
2574	+	*/
2575	+	//#define TMC_HOME_PHASE { 896, 896, 896 }
2576	+
2577	+	/**
2578	+	* Beta feature!
2579	+	* Create a 50/50 square wave step pulse optimal for stepper drivers.
2580	+	*/
2581	+	//#define SQUARE_WAVE_STEPPING
2582	+
2583	+	/**
2584	+	* Enable M122 debugging command for TMC stepper drivers.
2585	+	* M122 S0/1 will enable continous reporting.
2586	+	*/
2587	+	#define TMC_DEBUG
2588	+
2589	+	/**
2590	+	* You can set your own advanced settings by filling in predefined functions.
2591	+	* A list of available functions can be found on the library github page
2592	+	* https://github.com/teemuatlut/TMCStepper
2593	+	*
2594	+	* Example:
2595	+	* #define TMC_ADV() { \
2596	+	* stepperX.diag0_otpw(1); \
2597	+	* stepperY.intpol(0); \
2598	+	* }
2599	+	*/
2600	+	#define TMC_ADV() { }
2601	+
2602	+	#endif // HAS_TRINAMIC_CONFIG
2603	+
2604	+	// @section L64XX
2605	+
2606	+	/**
2607	+	* L64XX Stepper Driver options
2608	+	*
2609	+	* Arduino-L6470 library (0.8.0 or higher) is required.
2610	+	* https://github.com/ameyer/Arduino-L6470
2611	+	*
2612	+	* Requires the following to be defined in your pins_YOUR_BOARD file
2613	+	* L6470_CHAIN_SCK_PIN
2614	+	* L6470_CHAIN_MISO_PIN
2615	+	* L6470_CHAIN_MOSI_PIN
2616	+	* L6470_CHAIN_SS_PIN
2617	+	* ENABLE_RESET_L64XX_CHIPS(Q) where Q is 1 to enable and 0 to reset
2618	+	*/
2619	+
2620	+	#if HAS_L64XX
2621	+
2622	+	//#define L6470_CHITCHAT // Display additional status info
2623	+
2624	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(X)
2625	+	#define X_MICROSTEPS 128 // Number of microsteps (VALID: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 128) - L6474 max is 16
2626	+	#define X_OVERCURRENT 2000 // (mA) Current where the driver detects an over current
2627	+	// L6470 & L6474 - VALID: 375 x (1 - 16) - 6A max - rounds down
2628	+	// POWERSTEP01: VALID: 1000 x (1 - 32) - 32A max - rounds down
2629	+	#define X_STALLCURRENT 1500 // (mA) Current where the driver detects a stall (VALID: 31.25 * (1-128) - 4A max - rounds down)
2630	+	// L6470 & L6474 - VALID: 31.25 * (1-128) - 4A max - rounds down
2631	+	// POWERSTEP01: VALID: 200 x (1 - 32) - 6.4A max - rounds down
2632	+	// L6474 - STALLCURRENT setting is used to set the nominal (TVAL) current
2633	+	#define X_MAX_VOLTAGE 127 // 0-255, Maximum effective voltage seen by stepper - not used by L6474
2634	+	#define X_CHAIN_POS -1 // Position in SPI chain, 0=Not in chain, 1=Nearest MOSI
2635	+	#define X_SLEW_RATE 1 // 0-3, Slew 0 is slowest, 3 is fastest
2636	+	#endif
2637	+
2638	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(X2)
2639	+	#define X2_MICROSTEPS 128
2640	+	#define X2_OVERCURRENT 2000
2641	+	#define X2_STALLCURRENT 1500
2642	+	#define X2_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2643	+	#define X2_CHAIN_POS -1
2644	+	#define X2_SLEW_RATE 1
2645	+	#endif
2646	+
2647	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Y)
2648	+	#define Y_MICROSTEPS 128
2649	+	#define Y_OVERCURRENT 2000
2650	+	#define Y_STALLCURRENT 1500
2651	+	#define Y_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2652	+	#define Y_CHAIN_POS -1
2653	+	#define Y_SLEW_RATE 1
2654	+	#endif
2655	+
2656	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Y2)
2657	+	#define Y2_MICROSTEPS 128
2658	+	#define Y2_OVERCURRENT 2000
2659	+	#define Y2_STALLCURRENT 1500
2660	+	#define Y2_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2661	+	#define Y2_CHAIN_POS -1
2662	+	#define Y2_SLEW_RATE 1
2663	+	#endif
2664	+
2665	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Z)
2666	+	#define Z_MICROSTEPS 128
2667	+	#define Z_OVERCURRENT 2000
2668	+	#define Z_STALLCURRENT 1500
2669	+	#define Z_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2670	+	#define Z_CHAIN_POS -1
2671	+	#define Z_SLEW_RATE 1
2672	+	#endif
2673	+
2674	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Z2)
2675	+	#define Z2_MICROSTEPS 128
2676	+	#define Z2_OVERCURRENT 2000
2677	+	#define Z2_STALLCURRENT 1500
2678	+	#define Z2_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2679	+	#define Z2_CHAIN_POS -1
2680	+	#define Z2_SLEW_RATE 1
2681	+	#endif
2682	+
2683	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Z3)
2684	+	#define Z3_MICROSTEPS 128
2685	+	#define Z3_OVERCURRENT 2000
2686	+	#define Z3_STALLCURRENT 1500
2687	+	#define Z3_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2688	+	#define Z3_CHAIN_POS -1
2689	+	#define Z3_SLEW_RATE 1
2690	+	#endif
2691	+
2692	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(Z4)
2693	+	#define Z4_MICROSTEPS 128
2694	+	#define Z4_OVERCURRENT 2000
2695	+	#define Z4_STALLCURRENT 1500
2696	+	#define Z4_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2697	+	#define Z4_CHAIN_POS -1
2698	+	#define Z4_SLEW_RATE 1
2699	+	#endif
2700	+
2701	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E0)
2702	+	#define E0_MICROSTEPS 128
2703	+	#define E0_OVERCURRENT 2000
2704	+	#define E0_STALLCURRENT 1500
2705	+	#define E0_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2706	+	#define E0_CHAIN_POS -1
2707	+	#define E0_SLEW_RATE 1
2708	+	#endif
2709	+
2710	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E1)
2711	+	#define E1_MICROSTEPS 128
2712	+	#define E1_OVERCURRENT 2000
2713	+	#define E1_STALLCURRENT 1500
2714	+	#define E1_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2715	+	#define E1_CHAIN_POS -1
2716	+	#define E1_SLEW_RATE 1
2717	+	#endif
2718	+
2719	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E2)
2720	+	#define E2_MICROSTEPS 128
2721	+	#define E2_OVERCURRENT 2000
2722	+	#define E2_STALLCURRENT 1500
2723	+	#define E2_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2724	+	#define E2_CHAIN_POS -1
2725	+	#define E2_SLEW_RATE 1
2726	+	#endif
2727	+
2728	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E3)
2729	+	#define E3_MICROSTEPS 128
2730	+	#define E3_OVERCURRENT 2000
2731	+	#define E3_STALLCURRENT 1500
2732	+	#define E3_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2733	+	#define E3_CHAIN_POS -1
2734	+	#define E3_SLEW_RATE 1
2735	+	#endif
2736	+
2737	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E4)
2738	+	#define E4_MICROSTEPS 128
2739	+	#define E4_OVERCURRENT 2000
2740	+	#define E4_STALLCURRENT 1500
2741	+	#define E4_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2742	+	#define E4_CHAIN_POS -1
2743	+	#define E4_SLEW_RATE 1
2744	+	#endif
2745	+
2746	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E5)
2747	+	#define E5_MICROSTEPS 128
2748	+	#define E5_OVERCURRENT 2000
2749	+	#define E5_STALLCURRENT 1500
2750	+	#define E5_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2751	+	#define E5_CHAIN_POS -1
2752	+	#define E5_SLEW_RATE 1
2753	+	#endif
2754	+
2755	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E6)
2756	+	#define E6_MICROSTEPS 128
2757	+	#define E6_OVERCURRENT 2000
2758	+	#define E6_STALLCURRENT 1500
2759	+	#define E6_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2760	+	#define E6_CHAIN_POS -1
2761	+	#define E6_SLEW_RATE 1
2762	+	#endif
2763	+
2764	+	#if AXIS_IS_L64XX(E7)
2765	+	#define E7_MICROSTEPS 128
2766	+	#define E7_OVERCURRENT 2000
2767	+	#define E7_STALLCURRENT 1500
2768	+	#define E7_MAX_VOLTAGE 127
2769	+	#define E7_CHAIN_POS -1
2770	+	#define E7_SLEW_RATE 1
2771	+	#endif
2772	+
2773	+	/**
2774	+	* Monitor L6470 drivers for error conditions like over temperature and over current.
2775	+	* In the case of over temperature Marlin can decrease the drive until the error condition clears.
2776	+	* Other detected conditions can be used to stop the current print.
2777	+	* Relevant G-codes:
2778	+	* M906 - I1/2/3/4/5 Set or get motor drive level using axis codes X, Y, Z, E. Report values if no axis codes given.
2779	+	* I not present or I0 or I1 - X, Y, Z or E0
2780	+	* I2 - X2, Y2, Z2 or E1
2781	+	* I3 - Z3 or E3
2782	+	* I4 - Z4 or E4
2783	+	* I5 - E5
2784	+	* M916 - Increase drive level until get thermal warning
2785	+	* M917 - Find minimum current thresholds
2786	+	* M918 - Increase speed until max or error
2787	+	* M122 S0/1 - Report driver parameters
2788	+	*/
2789	+	//#define MONITOR_L6470_DRIVER_STATUS
2790	+
2791	+	#if ENABLED(MONITOR_L6470_DRIVER_STATUS)
2792	+	#define KVAL_HOLD_STEP_DOWN 1
2793	+	//#define L6470_STOP_ON_ERROR
2794	+	#endif
2795	+
2796	+	#endif // HAS_L64XX
2797	+
2798	+	// @section i2cbus
2799	+
2800	+	//
2801	+	// I2C Master ID for LPC176x LCD and Digital Current control
2802	+	// Does not apply to other peripherals based on the Wire library.
2803	+	//
2804	+	//#define I2C_MASTER_ID 1 // Set a value from 0 to 2
2805	+
2806	+	/**
2807	+	* TWI/I2C BUS
2808	+	*
2809	+	* This feature is an EXPERIMENTAL feature so it shall not be used on production
2810	+	* machines. Enabling this will allow you to send and receive I2C data from slave
2811	+	* devices on the bus.
2812	+	*
2813	+	* ; Example #1
2814	+	* ; This macro send the string "Marlin" to the slave device with address 0x63 (99)
2815	+	* ; It uses multiple M260 commands with one B<base 10> arg
2816	+	* M260 A99 ; Target slave address
2817	+	* M260 B77 ; M
2818	+	* M260 B97 ; a
2819	+	* M260 B114 ; r
2820	+	* M260 B108 ; l
2821	+	* M260 B105 ; i
2822	+	* M260 B110 ; n
2823	+	* M260 S1 ; Send the current buffer
2824	+	*
2825	+	* ; Example #2
2826	+	* ; Request 6 bytes from slave device with address 0x63 (99)
2827	+	* M261 A99 B5
2828	+	*
2829	+	* ; Example #3
2830	+	* ; Example serial output of a M261 request
2831	+	* echo:i2c-reply: from:99 bytes:5 data:hello
2832	+	*/
2833	+
2834	+	//#define EXPERIMENTAL_I2CBUS
2835	+	#if ENABLED(EXPERIMENTAL_I2CBUS)
2836	+	#define I2C_SLAVE_ADDRESS 0 // Set a value from 8 to 127 to act as a slave
2837	+	#endif
2838	+
2839	+	// @section extras
2840	+
2841	+	/**
2842	+	* Photo G-code
2843	+	* Add the M240 G-code to take a photo.
2844	+	* The photo can be triggered by a digital pin or a physical movement.
2845	+	*/
2846	+	//#define PHOTO_GCODE
2847	+	#if ENABLED(PHOTO_GCODE)
2848	+	// A position to move to (and raise Z) before taking the photo
2849	+	//#define PHOTO_POSITION { X_MAX_POS - 5, Y_MAX_POS, 0 } // { xpos, ypos, zraise } (M240 X Y Z)
2850	+	//#define PHOTO_DELAY_MS 100 // (ms) Duration to pause before moving back (M240 P)
2851	+	//#define PHOTO_RETRACT_MM 6.5 // (mm) E retract/recover for the photo move (M240 R S)
2852	+
2853	+	// Canon RC-1 or homebrew digital camera trigger
2854	+	// Data from: https://www.doc-diy.net/photo/rc-1_hacked/
2855	+	//#define PHOTOGRAPH_PIN 23
2856	+
2857	+	// Canon Hack Development Kit
2858	+	// https://captain-slow.dk/2014/03/09/3d-printing-timelapses/
2859	+	//#define CHDK_PIN 4
2860	+
2861	+	// Optional second move with delay to trigger the camera shutter
2862	+	//#define PHOTO_SWITCH_POSITION { X_MAX_POS, Y_MAX_POS } // { xpos, ypos } (M240 I J)
2863	+
2864	+	// Duration to hold the switch or keep CHDK_PIN high
2865	+	//#define PHOTO_SWITCH_MS 50 // (ms) (M240 D)
2866	+
2867	+	/**
2868	+	* PHOTO_PULSES_US may need adjustment depending on board and camera model.
2869	+	* Pin must be running at 48.4kHz.
2870	+	* Be sure to use a PHOTOGRAPH_PIN which can rise and fall quick enough.
2871	+	* (e.g., MKS SBase temp sensor pin was too slow, so used P1.23 on J8.)
2872	+	*
2873	+	* Example pulse data for Nikon: https://bit.ly/2FKD0Aq
2874	+	* IR Wiring: https://git.io/JvJf7
2875	+	*/
2876	+	//#define PHOTO_PULSES_US { 2000, 27850, 400, 1580, 400, 3580, 400 } // (µs) Durations for each 48.4kHz oscillation
2877	+	#ifdef PHOTO_PULSES_US
2878	+	#define PHOTO_PULSE_DELAY_US 13 // (µs) Approximate duration of each HIGH and LOW pulse in the oscillation
2879	+	#endif
2880	+	#endif
2881	+
2882	+	/**
2883	+	* Spindle & Laser control
2884	+	*
2885	+	* Add the M3, M4, and M5 commands to turn the spindle/laser on and off, and
2886	+	* to set spindle speed, spindle direction, and laser power.
2887	+	*
2888	+	* SuperPid is a router/spindle speed controller used in the CNC milling community.
2889	+	* Marlin can be used to turn the spindle on and off. It can also be used to set
2890	+	* the spindle speed from 5,000 to 30,000 RPM.
2891	+	*
2892	+	* You'll need to select a pin for the ON/OFF function and optionally choose a 0-5V
2893	+	* hardware PWM pin for the speed control and a pin for the rotation direction.
2894	+	*
2895	+	* See https://marlinfw.org/docs/configuration/laser_spindle.html for more config details.
2896	+	*/
2897	+	//#define SPINDLE_FEATURE
2898	+	//#define LASER_FEATURE
2899	+	#if EITHER(SPINDLE_FEATURE, LASER_FEATURE)
2900	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_ACTIVE_STATE LOW // Set to "HIGH" if the on/off function is active HIGH
2901	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_PWM true // Set to "true" if your controller supports setting the speed/power
2902	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_PWM_INVERT false // Set to "true" if the speed/power goes up when you want it to go slower
2903	+
2904	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_FREQUENCY 2500 // (Hz) Spindle/laser frequency (only on supported HALs: AVR and LPC)
2905	+
2906	+	/**
2907	+	* Speed / Power can be set ('M3 S') and displayed in terms of:
2908	+	* - PWM255 (S0 - S255)
2909	+	* - PERCENT (S0 - S100)
2910	+	* - RPM (S0 - S50000) Best for use with a spindle
2911	+	*/
2912	+	#define CUTTER_POWER_UNIT PWM255
2913	+
2914	+	/**
2915	+	* Relative Cutter Power
2916	+	* Normally, 'M3 O<power>' sets
2917	+	* OCR power is relative to the range SPEED_POWER_MIN...SPEED_POWER_MAX.
2918	+	* so input powers of 0...255 correspond to SPEED_POWER_MIN...SPEED_POWER_MAX
2919	+	* instead of normal range (0 to SPEED_POWER_MAX).
2920	+	* Best used with (e.g.) SuperPID router controller: S0 = 5,000 RPM and S255 = 30,000 RPM
2921	+	*/
2922	+	//#define CUTTER_POWER_RELATIVE // Set speed proportional to [SPEED_POWER_MIN...SPEED_POWER_MAX]
2923	+
2924	+	#if ENABLED(SPINDLE_FEATURE)
2925	+	//#define SPINDLE_CHANGE_DIR // Enable if your spindle controller can change spindle direction
2926	+	#define SPINDLE_CHANGE_DIR_STOP // Enable if the spindle should stop before changing spin direction
2927	+	#define SPINDLE_INVERT_DIR false // Set to "true" if the spin direction is reversed
2928	+
2929	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_POWERUP_DELAY 5000 // (ms) Delay to allow the spindle/laser to come up to speed/power
2930	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_POWERDOWN_DELAY 5000 // (ms) Delay to allow the spindle to stop
2931	+
2932	+	/**
2933	+	* M3/M4 Power Equation
2934	+	*
2935	+	* Each tool uses different value ranges for speed / power control.
2936	+	* These parameters are used to convert between tool power units and PWM.
2937	+	*
2938	+	* Speed/Power = (PWMDC / 255 * 100 - SPEED_POWER_INTERCEPT) / SPEED_POWER_SLOPE
2939	+	* PWMDC = (spdpwr - SPEED_POWER_MIN) / (SPEED_POWER_MAX - SPEED_POWER_MIN) / SPEED_POWER_SLOPE
2940	+	*/
2941	+	#define SPEED_POWER_INTERCEPT 0 // (%) 0-100 i.e., Minimum power percentage
2942	+	#define SPEED_POWER_MIN 5000 // (RPM)
2943	+	#define SPEED_POWER_MAX 30000 // (RPM) SuperPID router controller 0 - 30,000 RPM
2944	+	#define SPEED_POWER_STARTUP 25000 // (RPM) M3/M4 speed/power default (with no arguments)
2945	+
2946	+	#else
2947	+
2948	+	#define SPEED_POWER_INTERCEPT 0 // (%) 0-100 i.e., Minimum power percentage
2949	+	#define SPEED_POWER_MIN 0 // (%) 0-100
2950	+	#define SPEED_POWER_MAX 100 // (%) 0-100
2951	+	#define SPEED_POWER_STARTUP 80 // (%) M3/M4 speed/power default (with no arguments)
2952	+
2953	+	/**
2954	+	* Enable inline laser power to be handled in the planner / stepper routines.
2955	+	* Inline power is specified by the I (inline) flag in an M3 command (e.g., M3 S20 I)
2956	+	* or by the 'S' parameter in G0/G1/G2/G3 moves (see LASER_MOVE_POWER).
2957	+	*
2958	+	* This allows the laser to keep in perfect sync with the planner and removes
2959	+	* the powerup/down delay since lasers require negligible time.
2960	+	*/
2961	+	#define LASER_POWER_INLINE
2962	+
2963	+	#if ENABLED(LASER_POWER_INLINE)
2964	+	/**
2965	+	* Scale the laser's power in proportion to the movement rate.
2966	+	*
2967	+	* - Sets the entry power proportional to the entry speed over the nominal speed.
2968	+	* - Ramps the power up every N steps to approximate the speed trapezoid.
2969	+	* - Due to the limited power resolution this is only approximate.
2970	+	*/
2971	+	#define LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID
2972	+
2973	+	/**
2974	+	* Continuously calculate the current power (nominal_power * current_rate / nominal_rate).
2975	+	* Required for accurate power with non-trapezoidal acceleration (e.g., S_CURVE_ACCELERATION).
2976	+	* This is a costly calculation so this option is discouraged on 8-bit AVR boards.
2977	+	*
2978	+	* LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID_CONT_PER defines how many step cycles there are between power updates. If your
2979	+	* board isn't able to generate steps fast enough (and you are using LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID_CONT), increase this.
2980	+	* Note that when this is zero it means it occurs every cycle; 1 means a delay wait one cycle then run, etc.
2981	+	*/
2982	+	//#define LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID_CONT
2983	+
2984	+	/**
2985	+	* Stepper iterations between power updates. Increase this value if the board
2986	+	* can't keep up with the processing demands of LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID_CONT.
2987	+	* Disable (or set to 0) to recalculate power on every stepper iteration.
2988	+	*/
2989	+	//#define LASER_POWER_INLINE_TRAPEZOID_CONT_PER 10
2990	+
2991	+	/**
2992	+	* Include laser power in G0/G1/G2/G3/G5 commands with the 'S' parameter
2993	+	*/
2994	+	//#define LASER_MOVE_POWER
2995	+
2996	+	#if ENABLED(LASER_MOVE_POWER)
2997	+	// Turn off the laser on G0 moves with no power parameter.
2998	+	// If a power parameter is provided, use that instead.
2999	+	//#define LASER_MOVE_G0_OFF
3000	+
3001	+	// Turn off the laser on G28 homing.
3002	+	//#define LASER_MOVE_G28_OFF
3003	+	#endif
3004	+
3005	+	/**
3006	+	* Inline flag inverted
3007	+	*
3008	+	* WARNING: M5 will NOT turn off the laser unless another move
3009	+	* is done (so G-code files must end with 'M5 I').
3010	+	*/
3011	+	//#define LASER_POWER_INLINE_INVERT
3012	+
3013	+	/**
3014	+	* Continuously apply inline power. ('M3 S3' == 'G1 S3' == 'M3 S3 I')
3015	+	*
3016	+	* The laser might do some weird things, so only enable this
3017	+	* feature if you understand the implications.
3018	+	*/
3019	+	//#define LASER_POWER_INLINE_CONTINUOUS
3020	+
3021	+	#else
3022	+
3023	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_POWERUP_DELAY 50 // (ms) Delay to allow the spindle/laser to come up to speed/power
3024	+	#define SPINDLE_LASER_POWERDOWN_DELAY 50 // (ms) Delay to allow the spindle to stop
3025	+
3026	+	#endif
3027	+	#endif
3028	+	#endif
3029	+
3030	+	/**
3031	+	* Coolant Control
3032	+	*
3033	+	* Add the M7, M8, and M9 commands to turn mist or flood coolant on and off.
3034	+	*
3035	+	* Note: COOLANT_MIST_PIN and/or COOLANT_FLOOD_PIN must also be defined.
3036	+	*/
3037	+	//#define COOLANT_CONTROL
3038	+	#if ENABLED(COOLANT_CONTROL)
3039	+	#define COOLANT_MIST // Enable if mist coolant is present
3040	+	#define COOLANT_FLOOD // Enable if flood coolant is present
3041	+	#define COOLANT_MIST_INVERT false // Set "true" if the on/off function is reversed
3042	+	#define COOLANT_FLOOD_INVERT false // Set "true" if the on/off function is reversed
3043	+	#endif
3044	+
3045	+	/**
3046	+	* Filament Width Sensor
3047	+	*
3048	+	* Measures the filament width in real-time and adjusts
3049	+	* flow rate to compensate for any irregularities.
3050	+	*
3051	+	* Also allows the measured filament diameter to set the
3052	+	* extrusion rate, so the slicer only has to specify the
3053	+	* volume.
3054	+	*
3055	+	* Only a single extruder is supported at this time.
3056	+	*
3057	+	* 34 RAMPS_14 : Analog input 5 on the AUX2 connector
3058	+	* 81 PRINTRBOARD : Analog input 2 on the Exp1 connector (version B,C,D,E)
3059	+	* 301 RAMBO : Analog input 3
3060	+	*
3061	+	* Note: May require analog pins to be defined for other boards.
3062	+	*/
3063	+	//#define FILAMENT_WIDTH_SENSOR
3064	+
3065	+	#if ENABLED(FILAMENT_WIDTH_SENSOR)
3066	+	#define FILAMENT_SENSOR_EXTRUDER_NUM 0 // Index of the extruder that has the filament sensor. :[0,1,2,3,4]
3067	+	#define MEASUREMENT_DELAY_CM 14 // (cm) The distance from the filament sensor to the melting chamber
3068	+
3069	+	#define FILWIDTH_ERROR_MARGIN 1.0 // (mm) If a measurement differs too much from nominal width ignore it
3070	+	#define MAX_MEASUREMENT_DELAY 20 // (bytes) Buffer size for stored measurements (1 byte per cm). Must be larger than MEASUREMENT_DELAY_CM.
3071	+
3072	+	#define DEFAULT_MEASURED_FILAMENT_DIA DEFAULT_NOMINAL_FILAMENT_DIA // Set measured to nominal initially
3073	+
3074	+	// Display filament width on the LCD status line. Status messages will expire after 5 seconds.
3075	+	//#define FILAMENT_LCD_DISPLAY
3076	+	#endif
3077	+
3078	+	/**
3079	+	* Power Monitor
3080	+	* Monitor voltage (V) and/or current (A), and -when possible- power (W)
3081	+	*
3082	+	* Read and configure with M430
3083	+	*
3084	+	* The current sensor feeds DC voltage (relative to the measured current) to an analog pin
3085	+	* The voltage sensor feeds DC voltage (relative to the measured voltage) to an analog pin
3086	+	*/
3087	+	//#define POWER_MONITOR_CURRENT // Monitor the system current
3088	+	//#define POWER_MONITOR_VOLTAGE // Monitor the system voltage
3089	+	#if EITHER(POWER_MONITOR_CURRENT, POWER_MONITOR_VOLTAGE)
3090	+	#define POWER_MONITOR_VOLTS_PER_AMP 0.05000 // Input voltage to the MCU analog pin per amp - DO NOT apply more than ADC_VREF!
3091	+	#define POWER_MONITOR_CURRENT_OFFSET -1 // Offset value for current sensors with linear function output
3092	+	#define POWER_MONITOR_VOLTS_PER_VOLT 0.11786 // Input voltage to the MCU analog pin per volt - DO NOT apply more than ADC_VREF!
3093	+	#define POWER_MONITOR_FIXED_VOLTAGE 13.6 // Voltage for a current sensor with no voltage sensor (for power display)
3094	+	#endif
3095	+
3096	+	/**
3097	+	* CNC Coordinate Systems
3098	+	*
3099	+	* Enables G53 and G54-G59.3 commands to select coordinate systems
3100	+	* and G92.1 to reset the workspace to native machine space.
3101	+	*/
3102	+	//#define CNC_COORDINATE_SYSTEMS
3103	+
3104	+	/**
3105	+	* Auto-report temperatures with M155 S<seconds>
3106	+	*/
3107	+	#define AUTO_REPORT_TEMPERATURES
3108	+
3109	+	/**
3110	+	* Include capabilities in M115 output
3111	+	*/
3112	+	#define EXTENDED_CAPABILITIES_REPORT
3113	+	#if ENABLED(EXTENDED_CAPABILITIES_REPORT)
3114	+	//#define M115_GEOMETRY_REPORT
3115	+	#endif
3116	+
3117	+	/**
3118	+	* Expected Printer Check
3119	+	* Add the M16 G-code to compare a string to the MACHINE_NAME.
3120	+	* M16 with a non-matching string causes the printer to halt.
3121	+	*/
3122	+	//#define EXPECTED_PRINTER_CHECK
3123	+
3124	+	/**
3125	+	* Disable all Volumetric extrusion options
3126	+	*/
3127	+	//#define NO_VOLUMETRICS
3128	+
3129	+	#if DISABLED(NO_VOLUMETRICS)
3130	+	/**
3131	+	* Volumetric extrusion default state
3132	+	* Activate to make volumetric extrusion the default method,
3133	+	* with DEFAULT_NOMINAL_FILAMENT_DIA as the default diameter.
3134	+	*
3135	+	* M200 D0 to disable, M200 Dn to set a new diameter (and enable volumetric).
3136	+	* M200 S0/S1 to disable/enable volumetric extrusion.
3137	+	*/
3138	+	//#define VOLUMETRIC_DEFAULT_ON
3139	+
3140	+	//#define VOLUMETRIC_EXTRUDER_LIMIT
3141	+	#if ENABLED(VOLUMETRIC_EXTRUDER_LIMIT)
3142	+	/**
3143	+	* Default volumetric extrusion limit in cubic mm per second (mm^3/sec).
3144	+	* This factory setting applies to all extruders.
3145	+	* Use 'M200 [T<extruder>] L<limit>' to override and 'M502' to reset.
3146	+	* A non-zero value activates Volume-based Extrusion Limiting.
3147	+	*/
3148	+	#define DEFAULT_VOLUMETRIC_EXTRUDER_LIMIT 0.00 // (mm^3/sec)
3149	+	#endif
3150	+	#endif
3151	+
3152	+	/**
3153	+	* Enable this option for a leaner build of Marlin that removes all
3154	+	* workspace offsets, simplifying coordinate transformations, leveling, etc.
3155	+	*
3156	+	* - M206 and M428 are disabled.
3157	+	* - G92 will revert to its behavior from Marlin 1.0.
3158	+	*/
3159	+	//#define NO_WORKSPACE_OFFSETS
3160	+
3161	+	// Extra options for the M114 "Current Position" report
3162	+	//#define M114_DETAIL // Use 'M114` for details to check planner calculations
3163	+	//#define M114_REALTIME // Real current position based on forward kinematics
3164	+	//#define M114_LEGACY // M114 used to synchronize on every call. Enable if needed.
3165	+
3166	+	//#define REPORT_FAN_CHANGE // Report the new fan speed when changed by M106 (and others)
3167	+
3168	+	/**
3169	+	* Set the number of proportional font spaces required to fill up a typical character space.
3170	+	* This can help to better align the output of commands like `G29 O` Mesh Output.
3171	+	*
3172	+	* For clients that use a fixed-width font (like OctoPrint), leave this set to 1.0.
3173	+	* Otherwise, adjust according to your client and font.
3174	+	*/
3175	+	#define PROPORTIONAL_FONT_RATIO 1.0
3176	+
3177	+	/**
3178	+	* Spend 28 bytes of SRAM to optimize the GCode parser
3179	+	*/
3180	+	#define FASTER_GCODE_PARSER
3181	+
3182	+	#if ENABLED(FASTER_GCODE_PARSER)
3183	+	//#define GCODE_QUOTED_STRINGS // Support for quoted string parameters
3184	+	#endif
3185	+
3186	+	//#define GCODE_CASE_INSENSITIVE // Accept G-code sent to the firmware in lowercase
3187	+
3188	+	//#define REPETIER_GCODE_M360 // Add commands originally from Repetier FW
3189	+
3190	+	/**
3191	+	* CNC G-code options
3192	+	* Support CNC-style G-code dialects used by laser cutters, drawing machine cams, etc.
3193	+	* Note that G0 feedrates should be used with care for 3D printing (if used at all).
3194	+	* High feedrates may cause ringing and harm print quality.
3195	+	*/
3196	+	//#define PAREN_COMMENTS // Support for parentheses-delimited comments
3197	+	//#define GCODE_MOTION_MODES // Remember the motion mode (G0 G1 G2 G3 G5 G38.X) and apply for X Y Z E F, etc.
3198	+
3199	+	// Enable and set a (default) feedrate for all G0 moves
3200	+	//#define G0_FEEDRATE 3000 // (mm/min)
3201	+	#ifdef G0_FEEDRATE
3202	+	//#define VARIABLE_G0_FEEDRATE // The G0 feedrate is set by F in G0 motion mode
3203	+	#endif
3204	+
3205	+	/**
3206	+	* Startup commands
3207	+	*
3208	+	* Execute certain G-code commands immediately after power-on.
3209	+	*/
3210	+	//#define STARTUP_COMMANDS "M17 Z"
3211	+
3212	+	/**
3213	+	* G-code Macros
3214	+	*
3215	+	* Add G-codes M810-M819 to define and run G-code macros.
3216	+	* Macros are not saved to EEPROM.
3217	+	*/
3218	+	//#define GCODE_MACROS
3219	+	#if ENABLED(GCODE_MACROS)
3220	+	#define GCODE_MACROS_SLOTS 5 // Up to 10 may be used
3221	+	#define GCODE_MACROS_SLOT_SIZE 50 // Maximum length of a single macro
3222	+	#endif
3223	+
3224	+	/**
3225	+	* User-defined menu items that execute custom GCode
3226	+	*/
3227	+	//#define CUSTOM_USER_MENUS
3228	+	#if ENABLED(CUSTOM_USER_MENUS)
3229	+	//#define CUSTOM_USER_MENU_TITLE "Custom Commands"
3230	+	#define USER_SCRIPT_DONE "M117 User Script Done"
3231	+	#define USER_SCRIPT_AUDIBLE_FEEDBACK
3232	+	//#define USER_SCRIPT_RETURN // Return to status screen after a script
3233	+
3234	+	#define USER_DESC_1 "Home & UBL Info"
3235	+	#define USER_GCODE_1 "G28\nG29 W"
3236	+
3237	+	#define USER_DESC_2 "Preheat for " PREHEAT_1_LABEL
3238	+	#define USER_GCODE_2 "M140 S" STRINGIFY(PREHEAT_1_TEMP_BED) "\nM104 S" STRINGIFY(PREHEAT_1_TEMP_HOTEND)
3239	+
3240	+	#define USER_DESC_3 "Preheat for " PREHEAT_2_LABEL
3241	+	#define USER_GCODE_3 "M140 S" STRINGIFY(PREHEAT_2_TEMP_BED) "\nM104 S" STRINGIFY(PREHEAT_2_TEMP_HOTEND)
3242	+
3243	+	#define USER_DESC_4 "Heat Bed/Home/Level"
3244	+	#define USER_GCODE_4 "M140 S" STRINGIFY(PREHEAT_2_TEMP_BED) "\nG28\nG29"
3245	+
3246	+	#define USER_DESC_5 "Home & Info"
3247	+	#define USER_GCODE_5 "G28\nM503"
3248	+	#endif
3249	+
3250	+	/**
3251	+	* Host Action Commands
3252	+	*
3253	+	* Define host streamer action commands in compliance with the standard.
3254	+	*
3255	+	* See https://reprap.org/wiki/G-code#Action_commands
3256	+	* Common commands ........ poweroff, pause, paused, resume, resumed, cancel
3257	+	* G29_RETRY_AND_RECOVER .. probe_rewipe, probe_failed
3258	+	*
3259	+	* Some features add reason codes to extend these commands.
3260	+	*
3261	+	* Host Prompt Support enables Marlin to use the host for user prompts so
3262	+	* filament runout and other processes can be managed from the host side.
3263	+	*/
3264	+	//#define HOST_ACTION_COMMANDS
3265	+	#if ENABLED(HOST_ACTION_COMMANDS)
3266	+	//#define HOST_PROMPT_SUPPORT
3267	+	//#define HOST_START_MENU_ITEM // Add a menu item that tells the host to start
3268	+	#endif
3269	+
3270	+	/**
3271	+	* Cancel Objects
3272	+	*
3273	+	* Implement M486 to allow Marlin to skip objects
3274	+	*/
3275	+	//#define CANCEL_OBJECTS
3276	+
3277	+	/**
3278	+	* I2C position encoders for closed loop control.
3279	+	* Developed by Chris Barr at Aus3D.
3280	+	*
3281	+	* Wiki: https://wiki.aus3d.com.au/Magnetic_Encoder
3282	+	* Github: https://github.com/Aus3D/MagneticEncoder
3283	+	*
3284	+	* Supplier: https://aus3d.com.au/magnetic-encoder-module
3285	+	* Alternative Supplier: https://reliabuild3d.com/
3286	+	*
3287	+	* Reliabuild encoders have been modified to improve reliability.
3288	+	*/
3289	+
3290	+	//#define I2C_POSITION_ENCODERS
3291	+	#if ENABLED(I2C_POSITION_ENCODERS)
3292	+
3293	+	#define I2CPE_ENCODER_CNT 1 // The number of encoders installed; max of 5
3294	+	// encoders supported currently.
3295	+
3296	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_ADDR I2CPE_PRESET_ADDR_X // I2C address of the encoder. 30-200.
3297	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_AXIS X_AXIS // Axis the encoder module is installed on. <X\|Y\|Z\|E>_AXIS.
3298	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_TYPE I2CPE_ENC_TYPE_LINEAR // Type of encoder: I2CPE_ENC_TYPE_LINEAR -or-
3299	+	// I2CPE_ENC_TYPE_ROTARY.
3300	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_TICKS_UNIT 2048 // 1024 for magnetic strips with 2mm poles; 2048 for
3301	+	// 1mm poles. For linear encoders this is ticks / mm,
3302	+	// for rotary encoders this is ticks / revolution.
3303	+	//#define I2CPE_ENC_1_TICKS_REV (16 * 200) // Only needed for rotary encoders; number of stepper
3304	+	// steps per full revolution (motor steps/rev * microstepping)
3305	+	//#define I2CPE_ENC_1_INVERT // Invert the direction of axis travel.
3306	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_EC_METHOD I2CPE_ECM_MICROSTEP // Type of error error correction.
3307	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_1_EC_THRESH 0.10 // Threshold size for error (in mm) above which the
3308	+	// printer will attempt to correct the error; errors
3309	+	// smaller than this are ignored to minimize effects of
3310	+	// measurement noise / latency (filter).
3311	+
3312	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_ADDR I2CPE_PRESET_ADDR_Y // Same as above, but for encoder 2.
3313	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_AXIS Y_AXIS
3314	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_TYPE I2CPE_ENC_TYPE_LINEAR
3315	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_TICKS_UNIT 2048
3316	+	//#define I2CPE_ENC_2_TICKS_REV (16 * 200)
3317	+	//#define I2CPE_ENC_2_INVERT
3318	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_EC_METHOD I2CPE_ECM_MICROSTEP
3319	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_2_EC_THRESH 0.10
3320	+
3321	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_3_ADDR I2CPE_PRESET_ADDR_Z // Encoder 3. Add additional configuration options
3322	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_3_AXIS Z_AXIS // as above, or use defaults below.
3323	+
3324	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_4_ADDR I2CPE_PRESET_ADDR_E // Encoder 4.
3325	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_4_AXIS E_AXIS
3326	+
3327	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_5_ADDR 34 // Encoder 5.
3328	+	#define I2CPE_ENC_5_AXIS E_AXIS
3329	+
3330	+	// Default settings for encoders which are enabled, but without settings configured above.
3331	+	#define I2CPE_DEF_TYPE I2CPE_ENC_TYPE_LINEAR
3332	+	#define I2CPE_DEF_ENC_TICKS_UNIT 2048
3333	+	#define I2CPE_DEF_TICKS_REV (16 * 200)
3334	+	#define I2CPE_DEF_EC_METHOD I2CPE_ECM_NONE
3335	+	#define I2CPE_DEF_EC_THRESH 0.1
3336	+
3337	+	//#define I2CPE_ERR_THRESH_ABORT 100.0 // Threshold size for error (in mm) error on any given
3338	+	// axis after which the printer will abort. Comment out to
3339	+	// disable abort behavior.
3340	+
3341	+	#define I2CPE_TIME_TRUSTED 10000 // After an encoder fault, there must be no further fault
3342	+	// for this amount of time (in ms) before the encoder
3343	+	// is trusted again.
3344	+
3345	+	/**
3346	+	* Position is checked every time a new command is executed from the buffer but during long moves,
3347	+	* this setting determines the minimum update time between checks. A value of 100 works well with
3348	+	* error rolling average when attempting to correct only for skips and not for vibration.
3349	+	*/
3350	+	#define I2CPE_MIN_UPD_TIME_MS 4 // (ms) Minimum time between encoder checks.
3351	+
3352	+	// Use a rolling average to identify persistant errors that indicate skips, as opposed to vibration and noise.
3353	+	#define I2CPE_ERR_ROLLING_AVERAGE
3354	+
3355	+	#endif // I2C_POSITION_ENCODERS
3356	+
3357	+	/**
3358	+	* Analog Joystick(s)
3359	+	*/
3360	+	//#define JOYSTICK
3361	+	#if ENABLED(JOYSTICK)
3362	+	#define JOY_X_PIN 5 // RAMPS: Suggested pin A5 on AUX2
3363	+	#define JOY_Y_PIN 10 // RAMPS: Suggested pin A10 on AUX2
3364	+	#define JOY_Z_PIN 12 // RAMPS: Suggested pin A12 on AUX2
3365	+	#define JOY_EN_PIN 44 // RAMPS: Suggested pin D44 on AUX2
3366	+
3367	+	//#define INVERT_JOY_X // Enable if X direction is reversed
3368	+	//#define INVERT_JOY_Y // Enable if Y direction is reversed
3369	+	//#define INVERT_JOY_Z // Enable if Z direction is reversed
3370	+
3371	+	// Use M119 with JOYSTICK_DEBUG to find reasonable values after connecting:
3372	+	#define JOY_X_LIMITS { 5600, 8190-100, 8190+100, 10800 } // min, deadzone start, deadzone end, max
3373	+	#define JOY_Y_LIMITS { 5600, 8250-100, 8250+100, 11000 }
3374	+	#define JOY_Z_LIMITS { 4800, 8080-100, 8080+100, 11550 }
3375	+	//#define JOYSTICK_DEBUG
3376	+	#endif
3377	+
3378	+	/**
3379	+	* Mechanical Gantry Calibration
3380	+	* Modern replacement for the Prusa TMC_Z_CALIBRATION.
3381	+	* Adds capability to work with any adjustable current drivers.
3382	+	* Implemented as G34 because M915 is deprecated.
3383	+	*/
3384	+	//#define MECHANICAL_GANTRY_CALIBRATION
3385	+	#if ENABLED(MECHANICAL_GANTRY_CALIBRATION)
3386	+	#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_CURRENT 600 // Default calibration current in ma
3387	+	#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_EXTRA_HEIGHT 15 // Extra distance in mm past Z_###_POS to move
3388	+	#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_FEEDRATE 500 // Feedrate for correction move
3389	+	//#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_TO_MIN // Enable to calibrate Z in the MIN direction
3390	+
3391	+	//#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_SAFE_POSITION { X_CENTER, Y_CENTER } // Safe position for nozzle
3392	+	//#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_XY_PARK_FEEDRATE 3000 // XY Park Feedrate - MMM
3393	+	//#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_COMMANDS_PRE ""
3394	+	#define GANTRY_CALIBRATION_COMMANDS_POST "G28" // G28 highly recommended to ensure an accurate position
3395	+	#endif
3396	+
3397	+	/**
3398	+	* MAX7219 Debug Matrix
3399	+	*
3400	+	* Add support for a low-cost 8x8 LED Matrix based on the Max7219 chip as a realtime status display.
3401	+	* Requires 3 signal wires. Some useful debug options are included to demonstrate its usage.
3402	+	*/
3403	+	//#define MAX7219_DEBUG
3404	+	#if ENABLED(MAX7219_DEBUG)
3405	+	#define MAX7219_CLK_PIN 64
3406	+	#define MAX7219_DIN_PIN 57
3407	+	#define MAX7219_LOAD_PIN 44
3408	+
3409	+	//#define MAX7219_GCODE // Add the M7219 G-code to control the LED matrix
3410	+	#define MAX7219_INIT_TEST 2 // Test pattern at startup: 0=none, 1=sweep, 2=spiral
3411	+	#define MAX7219_NUMBER_UNITS 1 // Number of Max7219 units in chain.
3412	+	#define MAX7219_ROTATE 0 // Rotate the display clockwise (in multiples of +/- 90°)
3413	+	// connector at: right=0 bottom=-90 top=90 left=180
3414	+	//#define MAX7219_REVERSE_ORDER // The individual LED matrix units may be in reversed order
3415	+	//#define MAX7219_SIDE_BY_SIDE // Big chip+matrix boards can be chained side-by-side
3416	+
3417	+	/**
3418	+	* Sample debug features
3419	+	* If you add more debug displays, be careful to avoid conflicts!
3420	+	*/
3421	+	#define MAX7219_DEBUG_PRINTER_ALIVE // Blink corner LED of 8x8 matrix to show that the firmware is functioning
3422	+	#define MAX7219_DEBUG_PLANNER_HEAD 3 // Show the planner queue head position on this and the next LED matrix row
3423	+	#define MAX7219_DEBUG_PLANNER_TAIL 5 // Show the planner queue tail position on this and the next LED matrix row
3424	+
3425	+	#define MAX7219_DEBUG_PLANNER_QUEUE 0 // Show the current planner queue depth on this and the next LED matrix row
3426	+	// If you experience stuttering, reboots, etc. this option can reveal how
3427	+	// tweaks made to the configuration are affecting the printer in real-time.
3428	+	#endif
3429	+
3430	+	/**
3431	+	* NanoDLP Sync support
3432	+	*
3433	+	* Add support for Synchronized Z moves when using with NanoDLP. G0/G1 axis moves will output "Z_move_comp"
3434	+	* string to enable synchronization with DLP projector exposure. This change will allow to use
3435	+	* [[WaitForDoneMessage]] instead of populating your gcode with M400 commands
3436	+	*/
3437	+	//#define NANODLP_Z_SYNC
3438	+	#if ENABLED(NANODLP_Z_SYNC)
3439	+	//#define NANODLP_ALL_AXIS // Enables "Z_move_comp" output on any axis move.
3440	+	// Default behavior is limited to Z axis only.
3441	+	#endif
3442	+
3443	+	/**
3444	+	* WiFi Support (Espressif ESP32 WiFi)
3445	+	*/
3446	+	//#define WIFISUPPORT // Marlin embedded WiFi managenent
3447	+	//#define ESP3D_WIFISUPPORT // ESP3D Library WiFi management (https://github.com/luc-github/ESP3DLib)
3448	+
3449	+	#if EITHER(WIFISUPPORT, ESP3D_WIFISUPPORT)
3450	+	//#define WEBSUPPORT // Start a webserver (which may include auto-discovery)
3451	+	//#define OTASUPPORT // Support over-the-air firmware updates
3452	+	//#define WIFI_CUSTOM_COMMAND // Accept feature config commands (e.g., WiFi ESP3D) from the host
3453	+
3454	+	/**
3455	+	* To set a default WiFi SSID / Password, create a file called Configuration_Secure.h with
3456	+	* the following defines, customized for your network. This specific file is excluded via
3457	+	* .gitignore to prevent it from accidentally leaking to the public.
3458	+	*
3459	+	* #define WIFI_SSID "WiFi SSID"
3460	+	* #define WIFI_PWD "WiFi Password"
3461	+	*/
3462	+	//#include "Configuration_Secure.h" // External file with WiFi SSID / Password
3463	+	#endif
3464	+
3465	+	/**
3466	+	* Průša Multi-Material Unit v2
3467	+	* Enable in Configuration.h
3468	+	*/
3469	+	#if ENABLED(PRUSA_MMU2)
3470	+
3471	+	// Serial port used for communication with MMU2.
3472	+	// For AVR enable the UART port used for the MMU. (e.g., mmuSerial)
3473	+	// For 32-bit boards check your HAL for available serial ports. (e.g., Serial2)
3474	+	#define MMU2_SERIAL_PORT 2
3475	+	#define MMU2_SERIAL mmuSerial
3476	+
3477	+	// Use hardware reset for MMU if a pin is defined for it
3478	+	//#define MMU2_RST_PIN 23
3479	+
3480	+	// Enable if the MMU2 has 12V stepper motors (MMU2 Firmware 1.0.2 and up)
3481	+	//#define MMU2_MODE_12V
3482	+
3483	+	// G-code to execute when MMU2 F.I.N.D.A. probe detects filament runout
3484	+	#define MMU2_FILAMENT_RUNOUT_SCRIPT "M600"
3485	+
3486	+	// Add an LCD menu for MMU2
3487	+	//#define MMU2_MENUS
3488	+	#if ENABLED(MMU2_MENUS)
3489	+	// Settings for filament load / unload from the LCD menu.
3490	+	// This is for Průša MK3-style extruders. Customize for your hardware.
3491	+	#define MMU2_FILAMENTCHANGE_EJECT_FEED 80.0
3492	+	#define MMU2_LOAD_TO_NOZZLE_SEQUENCE \
3493	+	{ 7.2, 1145 }, \
3494	+	{ 14.4, 871 }, \
3495	+	{ 36.0, 1393 }, \
3496	+	{ 14.4, 871 }, \
3497	+	{ 50.0, 198 }
3498	+
3499	+	#define MMU2_RAMMING_SEQUENCE \
3500	+	{ 1.0, 1000 }, \
3501	+	{ 1.0, 1500 }, \
3502	+	{ 2.0, 2000 }, \
3503	+	{ 1.5, 3000 }, \
3504	+	{ 2.5, 4000 }, \
3505	+	{ -15.0, 5000 }, \
3506	+	{ -14.0, 1200 }, \
3507	+	{ -6.0, 600 }, \
3508	+	{ 10.0, 700 }, \
3509	+	{ -10.0, 400 }, \
3510	+	{ -50.0, 2000 }
3511	+	#endif
3512	+
3513	+	/**
3514	+	* MMU Extruder Sensor
3515	+	*
3516	+	* Support for a Průša (or other) IR Sensor to detect filament near the extruder
3517	+	* and make loading more reliable. Suitable for an extruder equipped with a filament
3518	+	* sensor less than 38mm from the gears.
3519	+	*
3520	+	* During loading the extruder will stop when the sensor is triggered, then do a last
3521	+	* move up to the gears. If no filament is detected, the MMU2 can make some more attempts.
3522	+	* If all attempts fail, a filament runout will be triggered.
3523	+	*/
3524	+	//#define MMU_EXTRUDER_SENSOR
3525	+	#if ENABLED(MMU_EXTRUDER_SENSOR)
3526	+	#define MMU_LOADING_ATTEMPTS_NR 5 // max. number of attempts to load filament if first load fail
3527	+	#endif
3528	+
3529	+	/**
3530	+	* Using a sensor like the MMU2S
3531	+	* This mode requires a MK3S extruder with a sensor at the extruder idler, like the MMU2S.
3532	+	* See https://help.prusa3d.com/en/guide/3b-mk3s-mk2-5s-extruder-upgrade_41560, step 11
3533	+	*/
3534	+	//#define PRUSA_MMU2_S_MODE
3535	+	#if ENABLED(PRUSA_MMU2_S_MODE)
3536	+	#define MMU2_C0_RETRY 5 // Number of retries (total time = timeout*retries)
3537	+
3538	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_FEEDRATE 800 // (mm/min)
3539	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_SEQUENCE \
3540	+	{ 0.1, MMU2_CAN_LOAD_FEEDRATE }, \
3541	+	{ 60.0, MMU2_CAN_LOAD_FEEDRATE }, \
3542	+	{ -52.0, MMU2_CAN_LOAD_FEEDRATE }
3543	+
3544	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_RETRACT 6.0 // (mm) Keep under the distance between Load Sequence values
3545	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_DEVIATION 0.8 // (mm) Acceptable deviation
3546	+
3547	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_INCREMENT 0.2 // (mm) To reuse within MMU2 module
3548	+	#define MMU2_CAN_LOAD_INCREMENT_SEQUENCE \
3549	+	{ -MMU2_CAN_LOAD_INCREMENT, MMU2_CAN_LOAD_FEEDRATE }
3550	+
3551	+	#endif
3552	+
3553	+	//#define MMU2_DEBUG // Write debug info to serial output
3554	+
3555	+	#endif // PRUSA_MMU2
3556	+
3557	+	/**
3558	+	* Advanced Print Counter settings
3559	+	*/
3560	+	#if ENABLED(PRINTCOUNTER)
3561	+	#define SERVICE_WARNING_BUZZES 3
3562	+	// Activate up to 3 service interval watchdogs
3563	+	//#define SERVICE_NAME_1 "Service S"
3564	+	//#define SERVICE_INTERVAL_1 100 // print hours
3565	+	//#define SERVICE_NAME_2 "Service L"
3566	+	//#define SERVICE_INTERVAL_2 200 // print hours
3567	+	//#define SERVICE_NAME_3 "Service 3"
3568	+	//#define SERVICE_INTERVAL_3 1 // print hours
3569	+	#endif
3570	+
3571	+	// @section develop
3572	+
3573	+	//
3574	+	// M100 Free Memory Watcher to debug memory usage
3575	+	//
3576	+	//#define M100_FREE_MEMORY_WATCHER
3577	+
3578	+	//
3579	+	// M42 - Set pin states
3580	+	//
3581	+	//#define DIRECT_PIN_CONTROL
3582	+
3583	+	//
3584	+	// M43 - display pin status, toggle pins, watch pins, watch endstops & toggle LED, test servo probe
3585	+	//
3586	+	//#define PINS_DEBUGGING
3587	+
3588	+	// Enable Marlin dev mode which adds some special commands
3589	+	//#define MARLIN_DEV_MODE

Newer Older